[go: up one dir, main page]

US20150141472A1 - Aryl-Phenyl-Sulfonamido-Cycloalkyl Compounds and Their Use - Google Patents

Aryl-Phenyl-Sulfonamido-Cycloalkyl Compounds and Their Use Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20150141472A1
US20150141472A1 US14/464,973 US201414464973A US2015141472A1 US 20150141472 A1 US20150141472 A1 US 20150141472A1 US 201414464973 A US201414464973 A US 201414464973A US 2015141472 A1 US2015141472 A1 US 2015141472A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
independently
present
treatment
cancer
compounds
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US14/464,973
Other versions
US9050329B1 (en
Inventor
Iain Robert Greig
Rose Mary Sheridan
Raymond Fisher
Matthew John Tozer
Juha Andrew Clase
Andrew Smith
Andrew Robert Tuffnell
Robert Jurgen Van 'T Hof
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Pimco 2664 Ltd
Original Assignee
Pimco 2664 Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Pimco 2664 Ltd filed Critical Pimco 2664 Ltd
Priority to US14/464,973 priority Critical patent/US9050329B1/en
Assigned to PIMCO 2664 LIMITED reassignment PIMCO 2664 LIMITED ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: SHERIDAN, ROSE MARY, GREIG, IAIN ROBERT, CLASE, JUHA ANDREW, VAN 'T HOF, ROBERT JURGEN, FISHER, RAYMOND, SMITH, ANDREW, TOZER, MATTHEW JOHN, TUFFNELL, ANDREW ROBERT
Publication of US20150141472A1 publication Critical patent/US20150141472A1/en
Priority to US14/720,237 priority patent/US9302984B2/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US9050329B1 publication Critical patent/US9050329B1/en
Priority to US15/075,356 priority patent/US9616037B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/16—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids
    • A61K31/18—Sulfonamides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/4418—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof having a carbocyclic group directly attached to the heterocyclic ring, e.g. cyproheptadine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02—Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C311/00—Amides of sulfonic acids, i.e. compounds having singly-bound oxygen atoms of sulfo groups replaced by nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
    • C07C311/15—Sulfonamides having sulfur atoms of sulfonamide groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C311/20—Sulfonamides having sulfur atoms of sulfonamide groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings having the nitrogen atom of at least one of the sulfonamide groups bound to a carbon atom of a ring other than a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C311/00—Amides of sulfonic acids, i.e. compounds having singly-bound oxygen atoms of sulfo groups replaced by nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
    • C07C311/22—Sulfonamides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by singly-bound oxygen atoms
    • C07C311/28—Sulfonamides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by singly-bound oxygen atoms having the sulfur atom of at least one of the sulfonamide groups bound to a carbon atom of a ring other than a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C311/00—Amides of sulfonic acids, i.e. compounds having singly-bound oxygen atoms of sulfo groups replaced by nitrogen atoms, not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
    • C07C311/22—Sulfonamides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by singly-bound oxygen atoms
    • C07C311/29—Sulfonamides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by singly-bound oxygen atoms having the sulfur atom of at least one of the sulfonamide groups bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/28—Radicals substituted by singly-bound oxygen or sulphur atoms
    • C07D213/32—Sulfur atoms
    • C07D213/34—Sulfur atoms to which a second hetero atom is attached
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/44—Radicals substituted by doubly-bound oxygen, sulfur, or nitrogen atoms, or by two such atoms singly-bound to the same carbon atom
    • C07D213/52—Sulfur atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/61—Halogen atoms or nitro radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/26—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/30—Halogen atoms or nitro radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D295/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms
    • C07D295/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring nitrogen atoms
    • C07D295/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring nitrogen atoms substituted by singly or doubly bound nitrogen atoms
    • C07D295/135—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring nitrogen atoms substituted by singly or doubly bound nitrogen atoms with the ring nitrogen atoms and the substituent nitrogen atoms separated by carbocyclic rings or by carbon chains interrupted by carbocyclic rings

Definitions

  • PCT/GB2009/002221 is a non-provisional application of U.S. provisional patent application No. 61/098,271 filed Sep. 19, 2008 and United Kingdom patent application number 0817207.4 filed Sep. 19, 2008. The contents of each of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • the present invention pertains generally to the field of therapeutic compounds, and more specifically to certain aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds (collectively referred to herein as “APSAC compounds”).
  • APSAC compounds aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds
  • the present invention also pertains to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds, and the use of such compounds and compositions, both in vitro and in vivo, in treatment, for example, of inflammation and/or joint destruction and/or bone loss; of disorders mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system; of inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like; of disorders associated with bone loss, such as bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activity in r
  • Ranges are often expressed herein as from “about” one particular value, and/or to “about” another particular value. When such a range is expressed, another embodiment includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by the use of the antecedent “about,” it will be understood that the particular value forms another embodiment.
  • RA Rheumatoid arthritis
  • RA is a chronic inflammatory disease characterised by painful swelling, stiffness, loss of movement and the destruction of cartilage and bone.
  • RA is characterised by an inflammation of the synovial lining of multiple joints and commonly affects the joints of the wrist and hands and may also affect the elbows, shoulders, hips, neck and knees; the ultimate hallmark of RA is joint destruction.
  • RA is a common disease, estimated to affect up to 1% of adults in the developed world, with women more than twice as likely to be affected and over 30% of patients likely to become severely disabled within 20 years (see, e.g., Feldmann et al., 2006).
  • RA is one of the most important causes of disability in the western world and is associated with a significant reduction in quality of life as well as increased mortality if left untreated. The disease can start at any age, with individuals aged between 40 and 70 most commonly affected.
  • rheumatoid factor antibodies to the Fc fragment of IgG, known as rheumatoid factor, are present in 60-80% of adults with RA (see, e.g., Weissmann et al, 2006) but it is not known whether this factor is responsible for initiating the inflammatory cascade or is generated at a later stage and propagates the process (see, e.g., Weissmann et al, 2006); there is also a notable genetic predisposition to the disease, as shown by the presence of HLA-DR4 antibody in 70% of patients (see, e.g., Klareskog et al, 2006).
  • RA RA-induced RA
  • T-cells infiltrating the synovial membrane lining the affected joint; this then leads to the activation of macrophages, monocytes and synovial fibroblasts (see, e.g., Firestein, 1996) by way of cell-cell contact and release of various cytokines, including TNF ⁇ and IL-1 (see, e.g., Feldmann, 1996).
  • cytokines including TNF ⁇ and IL-1
  • Activation of these cells leads to the overproduction of a range of pro-inflammatory cytokines, of which the most important are TNF ⁇ , IL-1 and IL-6 (see, e.g., Brennan et al, 1996; McInnes et al, 2005).
  • pro-inflammatory cytokines are then instrumental in orchestrating several complex signal transduction cascades, including the NF ⁇ B, MAPK and Jak/STAT pathways (see, e.g., Firestein et al, 1999) which lead to the induction of genes coding for various products that propagate the inflammatory response and also promote tissue destruction.
  • tissue-degrading enzymes such as collagenases, matrix metalloproteases, cathepsins, and other pro-inflammatory factors such as selectins, integrins, leukotrienes, prostaglandins, chemokines, and other cytokines.
  • TNF ⁇ and IL-1 also induce RANKL expression.
  • RANKL is an essential factor for the generation of osteoclasts (see, e.g., Tanaka et al, 2003; Roodman, 2006), and upregulated RANKL-production leads to increased osteoclast differentiation and ultimately bone destruction (see, e.g., Tanaka et al, 2003; Roodman, 2006).
  • the inflammatory response leads to the accumulation of many leukocytes and immune factor populations within the affected joint and also to hyperplasia of the Type-A and Type-B synoviocytes (see, e.g., Firestein et al, 2005), leading to thickening and vascularisation of the synovium into a destructive and aggressive tissue known as a pannus.
  • the pannus contains both osteoclasts, which destroy bone, and metalloproteases, which continue the destruction of cartilage.
  • drugs include a number of older drugs, including gold salts; sulfasalazine; antimalarials such as hydroxychloroquine; D-penicillamine; immunosuppressants such as mycophenolic acid, azathioprine, cyclosporine A, tacrolimus and sirolimus; minocycline; leflunomide; and most importantly, methotrexate (see, e.g., Smolen et al, 2003).
  • Methotrexate is now the gold-standard therapy for clinical trial comparisons, and is generally used in combination with newer therapies. It is effective in most patients but, in common with all of the above agents, has significant gastrointestinal side effects, which lead to roughly 50% of patients eventually having to cease treatment with methotrexate (see, e.g., Mount et al, 2005).
  • a further drawback of these older DMARDs is the length of time taken for the drug to start acting, ranging from weeks with methoxtrexate, to months with gold salts. Whilst full remissions only occur in about a quarter of patients, for those showing no effect it is not generally possible to stop therapy without suffering the risk of a more violent disease rebound (see, e.g., Smolen et al, 2003).
  • anti-TNF anti-tumour necrosis factor
  • TNF ⁇ production within the joint may in fact play the pivotal role in orchestrating the production of other factors which leads to the persistence of inflammation and tissue damage (see, e.g., Feldmann et al, 2001; Brennan et al, 1999; Brennan, 1992).
  • TNF ⁇ TNF ⁇ -independent effects of IL-1 in RA, most notably bone destruction (see, e.g., van den Berg et al, 1999; van den Berg et al, 2002).
  • TNF ⁇ is a cytokine that effects many different functions, including the alteration of tissue remodelling, changes to the permeability of the epithelial cell barrier, activation of macrophages, up-regulation of adhesion molecules, recruitment of other immune response effectors and, most importantly in RA, it instigates the signalling cascade which leads to the activation of the transcription factors NF ⁇ B and AP-1 (see, e.g., Liu, 2005; Baud et al, 1999). Binding of TNF ⁇ and IL-1 to their respective receptors leads to the recruitment of downstream signal transducers called TRAFs.
  • I ⁇ B is the inhibitor of NF ⁇ B, which acts by preventing translocation of NF ⁇ B to the nucleus. Phosphorylation of I ⁇ B by I ⁇ B kinase leads to degradation of I ⁇ B. Once I ⁇ B has been degraded, NF ⁇ B migrates to the nucleus, where it promotes transcription of anti-apoptotic genes, which promote survival of T and B-cells, thereby prolonging the immune response. This prolongation of the inflammatory response is central to the chronic nature of RA. The importance of NF ⁇ B activation is demonstrated by the fact that inhibition of NF ⁇ B activity by inhibitory peptides can prevent arthritis in animal models of RA (see, e.g., Jimi et al, 2004).
  • Anti-TNF ⁇ therapy represents the market-leading therapies for RA, and is performed either with neutralising antibodies such as infliximab (Remicade® J&J and Schering Plough) and adalimumab (Humira®, Abbott) or decoy receptors such as etanercept (Enbrel® Amgen and Wyeth), both which represent validated and highly effective treatments for RA.
  • Anti-TNF ⁇ biologicals are already licensed for RA, Crohn's disease, and psoriasis. A number of other inflammatory and autoimmune disorders are also being investigated as potential targets.
  • TNF ⁇ tumor necrosis factor ⁇
  • Cimzia® pegylated anti-TNF ⁇ fragment certolizumab
  • TACE TNF ⁇ converting enzyme
  • metalloproteases responsible for cleaving TNF ⁇ from the cell surface see, e.g., Smolen et al, 2003; Mount et al, 2005.
  • TNF ⁇ inflammatory bowel disease
  • IBD inflammatory bowel disease
  • psoriasis inflammatory bowel disease
  • IBD ulcerative colitis
  • UC ulcerative colitis
  • CD Crohn's disease
  • Psoriasis is an inflammatory response of the skin affecting 1-3% of the population in the western world.
  • the disease is characterised by raised, red, scaly plaques on the skin, which may be itchy and also cause significant psychological distress by their unsightly nature.
  • a further complication of psoriasis is the development of psoriatic arthritis, an inflammatory arthritis of the joints, in up to 40% of patients, which develops on average 10 years after the first symptoms of skin disease are seen (see, e.g., Gottling, 2005).
  • IBD and psoriasis are unknown and may involve a complex combination of infectious agents, environmental, and genetic factors, generating an inappropriate and prolonged inflammatory response.
  • IBD and psoriasis Treatment of IBD and psoriasis has followed a similar pattern to that of RA, with the past use of immunoregulatory agents such as NSAIDs, methotrexate, cyclosporine, steroids, and antimetabolites such as 6-mercaptopurine for IBD (see, e.g., Korzenik et al, 2006) and methotrexate and cyclosporine for psoriasis (see, e.g., Gottlieb, 2005).
  • the treatment of both has been revolutionised by the advent of biological agents, in particular those which block TNF ⁇ signalling.
  • Etanercept is licensed for the treatment of psoriasis and psoriatic arthritis; both infliximab and adalimumab are licensed for psoriatic arthritis, IBD, and psoriasis.
  • Apoptosis (programmed cell death) plays a key role in the removal of abnormal cells; defects in the signalling cascades, which would normally lead to its induction, play a key role in oncogenesis. Radiotherapy and many chemotherapeutic agents act by causing cellular damage, which would normally induce apoptosis; defects in the pathway will therefore also reduce the effectiveness of such agents.
  • the most important effector molecules in the signalling pathway leading to apoptosis are known as the caspases, which may be triggered by a number of stimuli, including TNF ⁇ binding to its receptor.
  • Osteoporosis is a common disease characterised by reduced bone density, deterioration of bone tissue, and an increased risk of fracture. Many factors contribute to the pathogenesis of osteoporosis including poor diet, lack of exercise, smoking, and excessive alcohol intake. Osteoporosis may also arise in association with inflammatory diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis, endocrine diseases such as thyrotoxicosis, and with certain drug treatments such as treatment with glucocorticoids. However one of the most important factors in the pathogenesis of osteoporosis is heredity.
  • Paget's disease of bone is a common condition of unknown cause, characterised by increased bone turnover and disorganised bone remodelling, with areas of increased osteoclastic and osteoblast activity.
  • Pagetic bone is often denser than normal, the abnormal architecture causes the bone to be mechanically weak, resulting in bone deformity and increased susceptibility to pathological fracture.
  • Cancer-associated bone disease can be manifest by the occurrence of hypercalcaemia or the development of osteolytic and/or osteosclerotic metastases. Increased osteoclastic bone resorption plays a key role in the pathogenesis of both conditions. Whilst almost any cancer can be complicated by bone metastases, the most common sources are multiple myeloma, breast carcinoma, and prostate carcinoma. The most common tumours associated with hypercalcaemia are multiple myeloma, breast carcinoma, and lung carcinoma.
  • RANKL signalling has been shown to play a major role in osteoclast over-activity and a consequent increase in bone loss (see, e.g., Tanaka et al, 2003; Roodman, 2006).
  • the use of drugs which affect this pathway has been validated by the completion of clinical trials of the monoclonal antibody against RANKL AMG-162 (Denosumab® Amgen) for the treatment of osteoporosis/multiple myeloma.
  • bone loss also plays a major role in the pathophysiology of rheumatoid arthritis and drugs which prevent activation of the signalling pathways described (e.g. TNF ⁇ blockers) are also able to prevent this bone loss.
  • drugs which prevent activation of the signalling pathways described e.g. TNF ⁇ blockers
  • the inventors have identified a new class of compounds which, for example, prevent inflammation and/or bone loss, and thus may be used in the treatment of diseases with an inflammatory or autoimmune component, including, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, psoriasis, and psoriatic arthritis; diseases which involve bone loss, including, for example, bone loss associated with rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, Paget's disease of bone, and multiple myeloma; as well as cancer associated with activation of NF ⁇ B, with aberrant NF ⁇ B signaling, or with inflammation, including haematological malignancies such as multiple myeloma, leukaemia, T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, and other lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma), and solid tumours such as cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain
  • this action may be via a mechanism that involves blocking TNF ⁇ and/or IL-1 and/or RANKL-signalling.
  • Greig et al., 2004 and Greig et al., 2006 describe a class of biphenyl alkyl sulfonamides as anti-resorptive agents for the treatment of bone diseases, including, for example, 2′,4′-difluoro-biphenyl-4-sulfonic acid (5-hydroxy-pentyl)-amide (ABD248) and 2′,4′-difluoro-biphenyl-4-sulfonic acid (4-hydroxy-butyl)-amide (ABD256) (shown below).
  • the present inventors have identified a new a class of aryl sulfonamides, as defined herein, that have surprising and unexpected properties.
  • the present inventors have identified a new a class of aryl sulfonamides, as defined herein, that have, inter alia, one or more surprising and unexpected properties.
  • the inventors believe that the new compounds have been protected against the major route of metabolism acting upon the previous biphenyl aryl sulfonamides (specifically, oxidation of the terminal alcohol to give a carboxylic acid) by the replacement of the aryl ring with a carbocyclic group; this may also be further combined with replacement of the alcohol by an amine.
  • these replacement groups have also been selected to provide a further substantial enhancement in the aqueous solubility of the compounds. If a drug is to show oral activity, it must first be solvated, to permit absorption from the gastrointestinal tract. Second, the drug must be sufficiently resistant to first-pass metabolism by metabolic enzymes contained within the liver so as to be able to enter the circulation and permit sufficient quantities to reach the biological target. Third, the drug must be sufficiently potent against the biological target to give the desired therapeutic effect.
  • the optimization of pharmacokinetic properties (action of the body on the drug) of a drug is a developmental barrier of equal challenge as compared to the optimization of pharmacodynamic properties (action of the drug on the body).
  • the new compounds disclosed herein show substantial improvements in their properties as oral therapeutic agents, as compared to previous compounds identified above.
  • the new compounds combine the characteristics required of orally active agents for the treatment of inflammatory diseases and/or for the treatment of bone loss.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to certain aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds (for convenience, collectively referred to herein as “APSAC compounds”), as described herein.
  • APSAC compounds aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds
  • compositions e.g., a pharmaceutical composition
  • a composition comprising an APSAC compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • compositions e.g., a pharmaceutical composition
  • a composition comprising the step of admixing an APSAC compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting an inflammatory response, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting an immune system component with an effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting cellular and/or molecular pathways leading to joint destruction, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting cells associated with an immune response with a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting osteoclast survival, formation, and/or activity, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting an osteoclast with an effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting bone resorption, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting cells in the bone microenvironment with a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to a method of treatment comprising administering to a subject in need of treatment a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to an APSAC compound as described herein for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body by therapy.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to use of an APSAC compound, as described herein, in the manufacture of a medicament for use in treatment.
  • the treatment is treatment of inflammation and/or joint destruction and/or bone loss.
  • the treatment is treatment of disorders mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system.
  • the treatment is treatment of inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • inflammatory and autoimmune disorders for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • the treatment is treatment of inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • inflammatory and autoimmune disorders for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • the treatment is treatment of disorders associated with bone loss, such as bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activation in rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, cancer-associated bone disease, Paget's disease and the like.
  • the treatment is treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma), e.g., a haematological malignancy, multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma) associated with activation of NF ⁇ B, with aberrant NF ⁇ B signalling, or with inflammation, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a haematological malignancy e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma
  • a haematological malignancy e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma
  • NF ⁇ B e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
  • inflammation
  • the treatment is treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, or melanoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, and melanoma associated with activation of NF ⁇ B, with aberrant NF ⁇ B signalling, or with inflammation, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a solid tumour cancer e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male)
  • colon cancer e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male
  • colon cancer e.g., a solid tumour cancer, cancer of the bladder, breast cancer
  • the treatment is treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia, e.g., a haematological malignancy, T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a haematological malignancy e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • the treatment is treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a solid tumour cancer e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male)
  • gastric cancer e.g., prostate cancer, colon cancer
  • basal cell ameloblastoma associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and
  • the treatment is part of treatment by combination therapy, e.g., in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • kits comprising (a) an APSAC compound, as described herein, preferably provided as a pharmaceutical composition and in a suitable container and/or with suitable packaging; and (b) instructions for use, for example, written instructions on how to administer the compound.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to an APSAC compound obtainable by a method of synthesis as described herein, or a method comprising a method of synthesis as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to an APSAC compound obtained by a method of synthesis as described herein, or a method comprising a method of synthesis as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to novel intermediates, as described herein, which are suitable for use in the methods of synthesis described herein.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to the use of such novel intermediates, as described herein, in the methods of synthesis described herein.
  • FIG. 1 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (ng/mL) of the APSAC compound ABD773 ( ⁇ ) after oral administration (1 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 2 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (ng/mL) of the APSAC compound ABD773 ( ⁇ ) after intravenous administration (1 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 3 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (ng/mL) of the APSAC compound ABD781 ( ⁇ ) after oral administration (1 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 4 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (ng/mL) of the APSAC compound ABD781 ( ⁇ ) after intravenous administration (1 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 5 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration ( ⁇ g/mL) of the reference compound ABD455 ( ⁇ ) after oral administration (2.5 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 6 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration ( ⁇ g/mL) of the reference compound ABD455 ( ⁇ ) after intravenous administration (2.5 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 7 is a series of images of human monocytes monitored using fluorescent light microscopy and showing the effects of ABD599 and ABD781 on caspase 3 activation in the presence of TNF ⁇ : (a) TNF ⁇ alone; (b) TNF ⁇ with 10 ⁇ M ABD599, and (c) TNF ⁇ with 10 ⁇ M ABD781.
  • the compounds of the present invention are structurally related to 1-(aryl)-phenyl-4-sulfonic acid cyclohexyl amide:
  • aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl or “APSAC” compounds
  • each —R C is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl
  • -A is independently:
  • —Ar is independently phenyl, pyridinyl, or pyrimidinyl.
  • —Ar is independently phenyl.
  • —Ar is independently pyridinyl.
  • —Ar is independently pyridin-2-yl.
  • —Ar is independently pyridin-3-yl.
  • —Ar is independently pyridin-4-yl.
  • —Ar is independently pyrimidinyl.
  • —Ar is independently pyrimidin-2-yl.
  • —Ar is independently pyrimidin-4-yl.
  • —Ar is independently pyrimidin-5-yl.
  • p is independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • p is independently an integer from 1 to 3.
  • p is independently 0.
  • p is independently 1.
  • p is independently 2.
  • p is independently 3.
  • -A is independently:
  • -A is independently:
  • -A is independently:
  • -A is independently:
  • the Group -A Phenyl and Pyridinyl: the Groups ⁇ W— and —Y ⁇
  • ⁇ W— is —CH ⁇ and —Y ⁇ is —CH ⁇ , as in, for example:
  • ⁇ W— is —CH ⁇ or —CR W ⁇ and —Y ⁇ is —N ⁇ .
  • ⁇ W— is —CH ⁇ and —Y ⁇ is —N ⁇ , as in, for example:
  • ⁇ W— is —N ⁇ and —Y ⁇ is —CH ⁇ , as in, for example:
  • —R W if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —R W if present, is independently -Me.
  • —R Y if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —R Y if present, is independently -Me.
  • -A is independently:
  • —R X2 if present, is independently —H or —R X2S .
  • —R X2 if present, is independently —R X2S .
  • —R X2 if present, is independently —H.
  • —R X3 if present, is independently —H or —R X3S .
  • —R X3 if present, is independently —R X3S .
  • —R X3 if present, is independently —H.
  • —R X4 if present, is independently —H or —R X4S .
  • —R X4 if present, is independently —R X4S .
  • —R X4 if present, is independently —H.
  • the leading phenylene group is the phenylene group that links the group -A, on the left, with the group —S( ⁇ O) 2 N(R S N)(DQ), on the right.
  • the leading phenylene group is:
  • q is independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • q is independently an integer from 1 to 3.
  • q is independently 0.
  • q is independently 1.
  • q is independently 2.
  • leading phenylene group is:
  • each —R X is independently:
  • each —R X is independently:
  • each —R X is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XX , —OH, —OR XX , —SR XX , —CF 3 , —OCF 3 , —SCF 3 , —C( ⁇ O)R XX , —CN, or —NO 2 .
  • each —R X is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XX , —OH, —OR XX , —SR XX , —CF 3 , —OCF 3 , —SCF 3 , —CN, or —NO 2 .
  • each —R X is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XX , —OH, —OR XX , —SR XX , —CF 3 , —OCF 3 , —CN, or —NO 2 .
  • each —R X is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XX , —OR XX , —SR XX , —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 .
  • each —R XX is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-6 alkyl, phenyl, or benzyl.
  • each —R XX is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-6 alkyl.
  • each —R XX is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —NR YY R ZZ is independently pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —NR YY R ZZ is independently pyrrolidino, piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • leading phenylene group is:
  • each —R XCC if present, is independently —F, —Cl, or —R XCCC .
  • each —R XCC if present, is independently —R XCCC .
  • each —R XCCC is independently -Me, -Et, -nPr, or -iPr.
  • each —R XCCC if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • —R X2S if present, is independently —R X .
  • —R X2S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XA , —OR XA , —SR XA , —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 , wherein each —R XA is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —R X2S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XA , —OR XA , —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 .
  • —R X2S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 .
  • —R X2S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, or —CF 3 .
  • —R X2S if present, is independently —F or —Cl.
  • —R X2S if present, is independently —F.
  • —R X2S if present, is independently —Cl.
  • —R X3S if present, is independently —R X .
  • —R X3S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XA , —OR XA , —SR XA , —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 , wherein each —R XA is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —R X3S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XA , —OR XA , —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 .
  • —R X3S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 .
  • —R X3S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, or —CF 3 .
  • —R X3S if present, is independently —F or —Cl.
  • —R X3S if present, is independently —F.
  • —R X3S if present, is independently —Cl.
  • —R X4S if present, is independently —R X .
  • —R X4S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XA , —OR XA , —SR XA , —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 , wherein each —R XA is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —R X4S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R XA , —OR XA , —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 .
  • —R X4S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CF 3 , or —OCF 3 .
  • —R X4S if present, is independently —F, —Cl, or —CF 3 .
  • —R X4S if present, is independently —F or —Cl.
  • —R X4S if present, is independently —F.
  • —R X4S if present, is independently —Cl.
  • —R X2S and —R X4S are each independently —F.
  • —R X2S and —R X4S are each independently —Cl.
  • each —R XA is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • each —R XA if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • each —R XA if present, is independently -Me.
  • -DQ is independently -D 1 -Q 1 .
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, cycloheptane-di-yl, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-di-yl, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-di-yl, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —R D .
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, or cycloheptane-di-yl, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —R D .
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, cycloheptane-di-yl, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-di-yl, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, or cycloheptane-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-1,2-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-1,3-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclohexane-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclohexane-1,2-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclohexane-1,3-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cycloheptane-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cycloheptane-1,2-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cycloheptane-1,3-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cycloheptane-1,4-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-1,2-di-yl, cyclopentane-1,3-di-yl, cyclohexane-1,3-di-yl, cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl, or cycloheptane-1,4-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently cyclopentane-1,2-di-yl, cyclopentane-1,3-di-yl, or cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-3,8-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-8,3-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-3,6-di-yl.
  • -D 1 - is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-6,3-di-yl.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, cycloheptane-yl-ylidene, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-yl-ylidene, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-yl-ylidene, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —R D .
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, cycloheptane-yl-ylidene, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-yl-ylidene, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-yl-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, or cycloheptane-yl-ylidene, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —R D .
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, or cycloheptane-yl-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene or cyclohexane-yl-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclopentane-1-yl-2-ylidine.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclopentane-1-yl-3-ylidine.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclohexane-yl-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclohexane-1-yl-2-ylidine.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclohexane-1-yl-3-ylidine.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cyclohexane-1-yl-4-ylidine.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cycloheptane-yl-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cycloheptane-1-yl-2-ylidine.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cycloheptane-1-yl-3-ylidine.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently cycloheptane-1-yl-4-ylidine.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-yl-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-3-yl-8-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-8-yl-3-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-yl-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-3-yl-6-ylidene.
  • -D 2 , if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-6-yl-3-ylidene.
  • each —R D is independently selected from —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —R DD , —CF 3 , —OH, —OR DD , —NH 2 , —NHR DD , and —NR DD 2 , wherein each —R DD is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • each —R DD if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • each —R DD if present, is independently -Me.
  • -D 1 - is independently 4-methyl-cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
  • -Q 1 is independently selected from:
  • -Q 1 is independently selected from:
  • -Q 1 is independently:
  • -Q 1 is independently:
  • -Q 1 is independently selected from:
  • -Q 1 is independently selected from:
  • -Q 1 is independently:
  • -Q 1 is independently:
  • -Q 1 is independently:
  • -Q 1 is independently selected from:
  • -Q 1 is independently selected from:
  • -Q 1 is independently:
  • -Q 1 is independently:
  • -Q 1 is independently:
  • —NR 1N R 2N is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —NR 1N R 2N is independently pyrrolidino, piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —NR 1N R 2N is independently piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —NR 1N R 2N if present, is independently pyrrolidino or morpholino.
  • —NR 1N R 2N if present, is independently morpholino.
  • each —R CN if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • each —R CN if present, is independently -Me.
  • each —R CF if present, is independently —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F.
  • each —R CF if present, is independently —CF 3 .
  • —NR 1N R 2N is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , —NHEt, —NEt 2 , —NMeEt, —NH(iPr), —NH(CH 2 CF 3 ), pyrrolidino, or morpholino.
  • —NR 1N R 2N is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , or morpholino.
  • —R 1A and —R 2A together form a saturated aliphatic C 2-4 alkylene group.
  • —R 1A and —R 2A together form —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 1A and —R 2A together form —CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 1B and —R 2B together form a saturated aliphatic C 2-4 alkylene group.
  • —R 1B and —R 2B together form —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 1B and —R 2B together form —CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 1B and —R 2B together form ⁇ O.
  • —R 3A and —R 4A together form a saturated aliphatic C 2-4 alkylene group.
  • —R 3A and —R 4A together form —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 3A and —R 4A together form —CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 5A and —R 6A together form a saturated aliphatic C 2-4 alkylene group.
  • —R 5A and —R 6A together form —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 5A and —R 6A together form —CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • R 4B if present, is independently —H.
  • —R 3B and —R 4B together form a saturated aliphatic C 2-4 alkylene group.
  • —R 3B and —R 4B together form —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 3B and —R 4B together form —CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 5B and —R 6B together form a saturated aliphatic C 2-4 alkylene group.
  • —R 5B and —R 6B together form —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R 5B and —R 6B together form —CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • —R O if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —R O if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • —R O if present, is independently -Me.
  • each —R C if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • each —R C if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • each —R C if present, is independently -Me.
  • each —R F is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 fluoroalkyl.
  • each —R F if present, is independently —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F.
  • each —R F if present, is independently —CF 3 .
  • —R J if present, is independently —NH 2 , —NH JN1 , —NR JN1 2 , or —NR JN2 R JN3 .
  • —R J if present, is independently —NH 2 , —NH JN1 , or —NR JN1 2 .
  • —R J if present, is independently —NH 2 .
  • —R J if present, is independently —NHR JN1 .
  • —R J if present, is independently —NR JN1 2 .
  • —R J if present, is independently —NR JN2 R JN3 .
  • each —R JN1 if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • each —R JN1 is independently -Me, -Et, or -iPr.
  • each —R JN1 if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • each —R JN1 if present, is independently -Me.
  • —NR JN2 R JN3 is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —NR JN2 R JN3 is independently piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —NR JN2 R JN3 if present, is independently morpholino.
  • —R J is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , —NHEt, —NEt 2 , —NH(nPr), —N(nPr) 2 , —NH(iPr), —N(iPr) 2 , piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino.
  • —R J if present, is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , or morpholino.
  • —R J if present, is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, or —NMe 2 .
  • -Q 1 is independently —OH, —CH 2 OH, —CH(Me)OH, —C(Me) 2 OH, —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , —NHEt, —NEt 2 , —NMeEt, —NH(iPr), pyrrolidino, morpholino, —NHCH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 NH 2 , —CH 2 NHMe, —CH 2 NMe 2 , —CH 2 NHEt, —CH 2 NEt 2 , —CH(NHMe)CH 2 OH, —C( ⁇ O)NH 2 , —C( ⁇ O)NHMe, —C( ⁇ O)NMe 2 , —C( ⁇ O)NHEt, or —C( ⁇ O)NEt 2 .
  • -Q 1 is independently —OH, —CH 2 OH, —CH(Me)OH, —C(Me) 2 OH, —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , —NHEt, —NEt 2 , or —CH(NHMe)CH 2 OH.
  • -Q 1 is independently —OH, —CH 2 OH, —CH(Me)OH, or —C(Me) 2 OH.
  • -Q 1 if present, is independently —OH.
  • -Q 1 is independently —CH 2 OH, —CH(Me)OH, or —C(Me) 2 OH.
  • -Q 1 if present, is independently —CH 2 OH.
  • -Q 1 is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , —NHEt, —NEt 2 , —NMeEt, —NH(iPr), pyrrolidino, morpholino, —NHCH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 NH 2 , —CH 2 NHMe, —CH 2 NMe 2 , —CH 2 NHEt, —CH 2 NEt 2 , —CH(NHMe)CH 2 OH, —C( ⁇ O)NH 2 , —C( ⁇ O)NHMe, —C( ⁇ O)NMe 2 , —C( ⁇ O)NHEt, or —C( ⁇ O)NEt 2 .
  • -Q 1 is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , —NHEt, —NEt 2 , —NMeEt, —NH(iPr), pyrrolidino, morpholino, —NHCH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 NH 2 , —CH 2 NHMe, —CH 2 NMe 2 , —CH 2 NHEt, —CH 2 NEt 2 , or —CH(NHMe)CH 2 OH.
  • -Q 1 is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , —NHEt, or —NEt 2 .
  • —R SN is independently —H or saturated aliphatic C 1-4 alkyl.
  • —R SN is independently —H, —Me, or -Et.
  • —R SN is independently —H.
  • —R J is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , —NHEt, —NEt 2 , —NH(nPr), —N(nPr) 2 , —NH(iPr), —N(iPr) 2 , piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino.
  • —R J is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, —NMe 2 , or morpholino.
  • —R J is independently —NH 2 , —NHMe, or —NMe 2 .
  • the APSAC compound has a molecular weight of from 317 to 1200.
  • the bottom of range is 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 500.
  • the top of range is 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700, or 600.
  • the range is from 350 to 700.
  • the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds are selected from a compound of the following formula and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds is selected from a compound of the following formula and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • the compound may have one or more chiral centres.
  • the chiral centre, or each chiral centre, if more than one is present, is independently in the R-configuration or the S-configuration.
  • One aspect of the present invention pertains to APSAC compounds, as described herein, in substantially purified form and/or in a form substantially free from contaminants.
  • the substantially purified form is at least 50% by weight, e.g., at least 60% by weight, e.g., at least 70% by weight, e.g., at least 80% by weight, e.g., at least 90% by weight, e.g., at least 95% by weight, e.g., at least 97% by weight, e.g., at least 98% by weight, e.g., at least 99% by weight.
  • the substantially purified form refers to the compound in any stereoisomeric or enantiomeric form.
  • the substantially purified form refers to a mixture of stereoisomers, i.e., purified with respect to other compounds.
  • the substantially purified form refers to one stereoisomer, e.g., optically pure stereoisomer.
  • the substantially purified form refers to a mixture of enantiomers.
  • the substantially purified form refers to an equimolar mixture of enantiomers (i.e., a racemic mixture, a racemate).
  • the substantially purified form refers to one enantiomer, e.g., optically pure enantiomer.
  • the contaminants represent no more than 50% by weight, e.g., no more than 40% by weight, e.g., no more than 30% by weight, e.g., no more than 20% by weight, e.g., no more than 10% by weight, e.g., no more than 5% by weight, e.g., no more than 3% by weight, e.g., no more than 2% by weight, e.g., no more than 1% by weight.
  • the contaminants refer to other compounds, that is, other than stereoisomers or enantiomers. In one embodiment, the contaminants refer to other compounds and other stereoisomers. In one embodiment, the contaminants refer to other compounds and the other enantiomer.
  • the substantially purified form is at least 60% optically pure (i.e., 60% of the compound, on a molar basis, is the desired stereoisomer or enantiomer, and 40% is the undesired stereoisomer or enantiomer), e.g., at least 70% optically pure, e.g., at least 80% optically pure, e.g., at least 90% optically pure, e.g., at least 95% optically pure, e.g., at least 97% optically pure, e.g., at least 98% optically pure, e.g., at least 99% optically pure.
  • 60% optically pure i.e., 60% of the compound, on a molar basis, is the desired stereoisomer or enantiomer, and 40% is the undesired stereoisomer or enantiomer
  • at least 70% optically pure e.g., at least 80% optically pure, e.g., at least 90% optically pure, e
  • Certain compounds may exist in one or more particular geometric, optical, enantiomeric, diasteriomeric, epimeric, atropic, stereoisomeric, tautomeric, conformational, or anomeric forms, including but not limited to, cis- and trans-forms; E- and Z-forms; c-, t-, and r-forms; endo- and exo-forms; R—, S—, and meso-forms; D- and L-forms; d- and l-forms; (+) and ( ⁇ ) forms; keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms; syn- and anti-forms; synclinal- and anticlinal-forms; ⁇ - and ⁇ -forms; axial and equatorial forms; boat-, chair-, twist-, envelope-, and halfchair-forms; and combinations thereof, hereinafter collectively referred to as “isomers” (or “isomeric forms”).
  • isomers are structural (or constitutional) isomers (i.e., isomers which differ in the connections between atoms rather than merely by the position of atoms in space).
  • a reference to a methoxy group, —OCH 3 is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, a hydroxymethyl group, —CH 2 OH.
  • a reference to ortho-chlorophenyl is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, meta-chlorophenyl.
  • a reference to a class of structures may well include structurally isomeric forms falling within that class (e.g., C 1-7 alkyl includes n-propyl and iso-propyl; butyl includes n-, iso-, sec-, and tert-butyl; methoxyphenyl includes ortho-, meta-, and para-methoxyphenyl).
  • C 1-7 alkyl includes n-propyl and iso-propyl
  • butyl includes n-, iso-, sec-, and tert-butyl
  • methoxyphenyl includes ortho-, meta-, and para-methoxyphenyl
  • keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/amidine, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, N-nitroso/hydroxyazo, and nitro/aci-nitro.
  • H may be in any isotopic form, including 1 H, 2 H (D), and 3 H (T); C may be in any isotopic form, including 12 C, 13 C, and 14 C; O may be in any isotopic form, including 16 O and 18 O; and the like.
  • a reference to a particular compound includes all such isomeric forms, including mixtures (e.g., racemic mixtures) thereof.
  • Methods for the preparation (e.g., asymmetric synthesis) and separation (e.g., fractional crystallisation and chromatographic means) of such isomeric forms are either known in the art or are readily obtained by adapting the methods taught herein, or known methods, in a known manner.
  • a corresponding salt of the compound for example, a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al., 1977, “Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts,” J. Pharm. Sci ., Vol. 66, pp. 1-19.
  • a salt may be formed with a suitable cation.
  • suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na + and K + , alkaline earth cations such as Ca 2+ and Mg 2+ , and other cations such as Al +3 .
  • Suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e., NH 4 + ) and substituted ammonium ions (e.g., NH 3 R + , NH 2 R 2 + , NHR 3 + , NR 4 + ).
  • suitable substituted ammonium ions are those derived from: ethylamine, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, triethylamine, butylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperizine, benzylamine, phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine.
  • An example of a common quaternary ammonium ion is N(CH 3 ) 4 + .
  • a salt may be formed with a suitable anion.
  • suitable inorganic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following inorganic acids: hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, sulfuric, sulfurous, nitric, nitrous, phosphoric, and phosphorous.
  • Suitable organic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following organic acids: 2-acetyoxybenzoic, acetic, ascorbic, aspartic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, cinnamic, citric, edetic, ethanedisulfonic, ethanesulfonic, fumaric, glucheptonic, gluconic, glutamic, glycolic, hydroxymaleic, hydroxynaphthalene carboxylic, isethionic, lactic, lactobionic, lauric, maleic, malic, methanesulfonic, mucic, oleic, oxalic, palmitic, pamoic, pantothenic, phenylacetic, phenylsulfonic, propionic, pyruvic, salicylic, stearic, succinic, sulfanilic, tartaric, toluenesulfonic, and valeric.
  • a reference to a particular compound also includes salt forms thereof.
  • solvate is used herein in the conventional sense to refer to a complex of solute (e.g., compound, salt of compound) and solvent. If the solvent is water, the solvate may be conveniently referred to as a hydrate, for example, a mono-hydrate, a di-hydrate, a tri-hydrate, etc.
  • a reference to a particular compound also includes solvate and hydrate forms thereof.
  • an appropriate biphenyl compound is prepared from a boronic acid and bromobenzene via a Suzuki coupling, for example, as described by O'Brien et al., 2000.
  • the biphenyl is sulfonylated using chlorosulfonic acid to give the corresponding sulfonic acid.
  • the acid is then reacted with thionyl chloride to give the corresponding aryl sulfonyl chloride.
  • the sulfonyl chloride is coupled with an amine to give the corresponding sulfonamide.
  • An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • the sulfonamide can be formed first, from a suitable bromobenzene sulfonyl chloride and amine, and the biphenyl compound then prepared by a similar Suzuki methodology.
  • a suitable bromobenzene sulfonyl chloride and amine and the biphenyl compound then prepared by a similar Suzuki methodology.
  • An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • the cyclohexanol can be replaced by a cyclohexane methyl alcohol, by coupling of the sulfonyl chloride with a carboxylic ester and subsequent reduction.
  • the biphenyl sulfonyl chloride can be reacted with 4-amino-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid methyl ester in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of a suitable base, such as pyridine, and then reduced, for example, with lithium aluminium hydride in a solvent, such as THF, to give the desired alcohol.
  • a solvent such as DCM
  • a suitable base such as pyridine
  • the cyclohexane moiety can be replaced by other carbocycles to give a range of target compounds.
  • each of the four isomers of 3-amino-cyclopentane carboxylic acid and each of the four isomers of 3-amino-cyclopentane acetic acid are known and available and can be coupled with the required sulfonyl chloride and subsequently reduced, for example, with lithium aluminium hydride, to give the desired alcohol. Examples of such methods are shown in the following schemes.
  • the alcohol can be replaced by an amide by direct reaction of the sulfonyl chloride with the required aminocarboxylic acid, subsequent chlorination of the acid, and coupling with the required amine.
  • a biphenylsulfonyl chloride can be coupled with 4-aminocyclohexane carboxylic acid in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of a base, such as pyridine, the acid chlorinated by reflux in thionyl chloride, in a solvent such as DCM, and then coupled with methylamine in a solvent such as THF.
  • the amide is reduced to the corresponding amine by reaction with a suitable reducing agent.
  • a suitable reducing agent for example, the amide can be reduced by lithium aluminium hydride in a solvent such as THF.
  • An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • the amino group can be introduced by direct reaction of a suitable amine with a sulfonyl chloride.
  • a sulfonyl chloride for example a biphenyl sulfonyl chloride can be coupled with 1,4-diaminocyclohexane in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of a suitable base, such as pyridine.
  • a solvent such as DCM
  • a suitable base such as pyridine
  • amino substitutions may be made by nucleophilic attack of a suitable amine on a cyclohexanone.
  • the cyclohexanone can be prepared from the cyclohexanol derivative by use of Jones' oxidation (chromium trioxide/sulfuric acid), subsequent reaction with methylamine, and reduction in the presence of sodium cyanoborohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride in a solvent, such as methanol or THF.
  • Jones' oxidation chromium trioxide/sulfuric acid
  • methylamine methylamine
  • reduction in the presence of sodium cyanoborohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride in a solvent, such as methanol or THF such as methanol or THF.
  • amine can be reacted with an acid chloride or anhydride, to give an amide, which may then be further reduced to give the secondary amine.
  • the amine can be acylated with trifluoroacetic anhydride in the presence of triethylamine and then reduced with borane in a solvent such as THF. The mixture of products may then be separated by preparative HPLC to give the cis- and trans-isomers.
  • An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • the cyclohexanone intermediate can be used to prepare cis- or trans-isomers where the required starting material is unavailable.
  • the cyclohexanone derivative can be prepared from trans-4-aminocyclohexanol and reduced with LS-Selectride (lithium trisiamylborohydride) in THF to give the cis-isomer as the final product.
  • LS-Selectride lithium trisiamylborohydride
  • the cyclohexanone intermediate can be reduced with a Grignard reagent to give the tertiary alcohol.
  • the cyclohexanone can be reacted with methyl magnesium bromide and the racemic mixture separated by preparative HPLC to give the cis- and trans-isomers.
  • An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • trans-4-aminocyclohexanol can be amino-protected with a suitable protecting group, oxidised to the cyclohexanone, reacted with a suitable Grignard, and then separated, prior to deprotection and coupling.
  • the amine can be BOC protected, using di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, the alcohol oxidised using pyridinium chlorochromate, the cyclohexanone reacted with methylmagnesium chloride and the BOC protecting group removed with a reagent such as trifluoroacetic acid or ethanolic HCl, following separation of the isomers by column chromatography.
  • a reagent such as trifluoroacetic acid or ethanolic HCl
  • the biphenyl sulfonamide group can be replaced by a heteroaryl-phenyl sulfonamide motif by preparation of any of the above derivatives as a bromophenyl sulfonamide derivative, preparation of the boronic acid or boronate, and subsequent Suzuki coupling with a substituted pyridyl bromide, at a suitable stage of the reaction pathway.
  • bromobenzene sulfonamide compounds can be prepared from the cyclohexanol, cyclohexane carboxylic acid, and cyclopentane carboxylic acid compounds described in the above schemes. These can then be reacted with bis(pinacolato)diboron to give the required borane, which can then be coupled with an appropriate heterocyclic bromide using Suzuki coupling. Examples of such methods are shown in the following schemes.
  • all four 2-aminocyclopentane carboxylate isomers can be prepared by reductive amination of ethyl 2-oxocyclopentanecarboxylate and used to prepare the respective sulfonamide-cyclopentane methyl alcohol compound.
  • ethyl 2-oxocyclopentanecarboxylate can be reacted with ammonium acetate and then reduced with sodium triacetoxyborohydride to give the racemic mixture of 2-aminocarboxylates, which may be separated by HPLC, or further coupled with a biphenyl sulfonyl chloride, reduced with lithium aluminium hydride and then separated.
  • An example is shown in the following scheme.
  • compositions e.g., a pharmaceutical composition
  • a composition comprising an APSAC compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient.
  • compositions e.g., a pharmaceutical composition
  • a composition comprising admixing an APSAC compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient.
  • APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be anti-inflammatory agents, which may act by blockade or modification of pro-inflammatory signalling pathways (for example those mediated by TNF ⁇ signalling and NF ⁇ B or AP-1 activation) and thus may prevent inflammation or suppress autoimmune responses or offer protection against joint destruction and other effects of chronic inflammatory disease.
  • pro-inflammatory signalling pathways for example those mediated by TNF ⁇ signalling and NF ⁇ B or AP-1 activation
  • APSAC compounds described herein are also believed to be anti-resorptive agents, which may act by blockade or modification of pathways that lead to excessive osteoclast activity (for example those mediated by RANKL, TNF ⁇ , and IL-1 signalling and NF ⁇ B activation) and thereby protect against the bone loss seen in osteoporosis and many chronic inflammatory conditions.
  • APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of inflammation and/or joint destruction and/or bone loss.
  • the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of disorders mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system.
  • the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of, inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • inflammatory and autoimmune disorders for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of disorders associated with bone loss, such as bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activation in rheumatoid arthritis; osteoporosis; cancer-associated bone disease; Paget's disease; and the like.
  • the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of haematological malignancies, e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma), e.g., haematological malignancies, multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma) associated with activation of NF ⁇ B, with aberrant NF ⁇ B signalling, or with inflammation.
  • haematological malignancies e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma
  • haematological malignancies e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma
  • haematological malignancies e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma
  • haematological malignancies e.g., multiple
  • the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of solid tumour cancers, e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, or melanoma, e.g., solid tumour cancers, cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, and melanoma associated with activation of NF ⁇ B, with aberrant NF ⁇ B signalling, or with inflammation.
  • solid tumour cancers e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male)
  • colon cancer e.g., kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, and melanoma associated with activation of NF ⁇ B, with aberrant NF ⁇ B signalling, or with inflammation.
  • the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia, e.g., a haematological malignancy, T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a haematological malignancy e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy
  • the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer or basal cell ameloblastoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a solid tumour cancer e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male)
  • gastric cancer e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male)
  • gastric cancer e.g., prostate cancer, colon cancer
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting an inflammatory response, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting an immune system component with an effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting cellular and/or molecular pathways leading to joint destruction, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting cells associated with an immune response with a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting osteoclast survival, formation, and/or activity, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting an osteoclast with an effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting bone resorption, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting cells in the bone microenvironment with a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • immune system component relates to, but is not restricted to, cells such as macrophages, T-cells, B-cells, NK-cells, monocytes, neutrophils, dendritic cells, lymphocytes, leukocytes, granulocytes, antigen-presenting cells, and other cells of the haematopoietic lineage including osteoclasts.
  • cells in the bone microenvironment pertains to cells such as osteoblasts, osteoclasts, osteocytes, and bone marrow stromal cells, which are located in close proximity to bone (e.g., within one hundred micrometers of the bone surface).
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to an APSAC compound, as described herein, for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body by therapy.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to use of an APSAC compound, as described herein, in the manufacture of a medicament for use in treatment.
  • the medicament comprises the APSAC compound.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to a method of treatment comprising administering to a patient in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
  • the treatment is treatment of an inflammatory disorder or an autoimmune disorder.
  • the treatment is treatment of a disorder associated with inflammation and/or activation of the immune system.
  • the treatment is treatment of a disorder mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system.
  • the treatment is treatment of inflammation.
  • the treatment is treatment of a disorder associated with inflammation or activation of the immune system.
  • the treatment is treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.
  • the treatment is treatment of psoriasis.
  • the treatment is treatment of psoriatic arthritis.
  • the treatment is treatment of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD).
  • COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
  • the treatment is treatment of atherosclerosis.
  • the treatment is treatment of ankylosing spondylitis.
  • the treatment is treatment of inflammatory bowel disease.
  • the treatment is prevention of an immune response leading to organ or graft rejection following transplant.
  • the treatment is treatment of a tumour which over expresses TNF ⁇ , IL-1, RANKL, or NF ⁇ B, or in which inhibition of TNF ⁇ , IL-1, RANKL, or NF ⁇ B facilitates or improves the action of cytotoxic tumouricidal agents.
  • the treatment is treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma), e.g., a haematological malignancy, multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma) associated with activation of NF ⁇ B, with aberrant NF ⁇ B signalling, or with inflammation, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a haematological malignancy e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma
  • a haematological malignancy e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma
  • NF ⁇ B e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
  • inflammation
  • the treatment is treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, or melanoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, and melanoma associated with activation of NF ⁇ B, with aberrant NF ⁇ B signalling, or with inflammation, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a solid tumour cancer e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male)
  • colon cancer e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male
  • colon cancer e.g., a solid tumour cancer, cancer of the bladder, breast cancer
  • the treatment is treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia, e.g., a haematological malignancy, T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a haematological malignancy e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • the treatment is treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • a solid tumour cancer e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male)
  • gastric cancer e.g., prostate cancer, colon cancer
  • basal cell ameloblastoma associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and
  • the treatment is part of treatment by combination therapy, e.g., in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • the treatment is treatment of a disease or disorder selected from: diseases having an inflammatory or autoimmune component, including asthma, atherosclerosis, allergic diseases, such as atopy, allergic rhinitis, atopic dermatitis, anaphylaxis, allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, and hypersensitivity pneumonitis (pigeon breeders disease, farmer's lung disease, humidifier lung disease, malt workers' lung disease); allergies, including flea allergy dermatitis in mammals such as domestic animals, e.g., dogs and cats, contact allergens including mosquito bites or other insect sting allergies, poison ivy, poison oak, poison sumac, or other skin allergens; autoimmune disorders, including, but not limited to, type I diabetes and associated complications, multiple sclerosis, arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune (Hasimoto's) thyroiditis, autoimmune liver diseases such as hepatitis and primary biliary cirrhosis, hyperthyroid
  • Pathol ., Vol. 178, p. 201 skin diseases such as lichen planus, delayed type hypersensitivity, chronic pulmonary inflammation, e.g., pulmonary alveolitis and pulmonary granuloma, gingival inflammation or other periodontal disease, and osseous inflammation associated with lesions of endodontic origin (Volejnikova et al., 1997 , Am. J. Pathol ., Vol. 150, p. 1711), hypersensitivity lung diseases such as hypersensitivity pneumonitis (Sugiyama et al., 1995, Eur. Respir. J ., Vol. 8, p. 1084), and inflammation related to histamine release from basophils (Dvorak et al., 1996, J. Allergy Clin.
  • skin diseases such as lichen planus, delayed type hypersensitivity, chronic pulmonary inflammation, e.g., pulmonary alveolitis and pulmonary granuloma, gingival inflammation or other periodontal disease, and osseous inflammation associated with lesions of
  • Immunol ., Vol. 98, p. 355) such as hay fever, histamine release from mast cells (Galli et al., 1989, Ciba Foundation Symposium , Vol. 147, p. 53), or mast cell tumours, types of type 1 hypersensitivity reactions (anaphylaxis, skin allergy, hives, gout, allergic rhinitis, and allergic gastroenteritis); ulcerative colitis or Crohn's disease; TNF ⁇ induced polycystic kidney disease (Li et al., 2008 , Nature Medicine , Vol. 14(8), p. 863); or Cryopyrin-Associated Periodic Syndromes, including Muckle-Wells Syndrome.
  • the treatment is treatment of a disorder mediated by osteoclasts.
  • the treatment is treatment of a disorder characterised by excessive bone resorption.
  • the treatment is treatment of bone loss.
  • the treatment is treatment of bone loss associated with inflammation.
  • the treatment is treatment of bone loss not associated with inflammation.
  • the treatment is treatment of bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activation.
  • the treatment is treatment of joint destruction.
  • the treatment is treatment of joint destruction associated with inflammation.
  • the treatment is treatment of joint destruction associated with excessive osteoclast activation.
  • the treatment is treatment of bone loss associated with rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, cancer-associated bone disease, or Paget's disease of bone.
  • the treatment is treatment of rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, cancer-associated bone disease, or Paget's disease of bone.
  • the treatment is treatment of neoplasia of bones, whether as a primary tumour or as metastases, including but not limited to, osteosarcoma and osteoma (Zheng et al., 1998 , J. Cell Biochem ., Vol. 70, p. 121) and cancer-associated bone disease (e.g., hypercalcaemia of malignancy, bone metastases, osteolytic bone metastases, multiple myeloma, breast carcinoma).
  • cancer-associated bone disease e.g., hypercalcaemia of malignancy, bone metastases, osteolytic bone metastases, multiple myeloma, breast carcinoma.
  • the treatment is treatment of hypercalcaemia caused by conditions associated with increased bone resorption, including, but not limited to: vitamin D intoxication, primary or tertiary hyperparathyroidism, immobilisation, and sarcoidosis.
  • the treatment is treatment of aseptic loosening of prosthetic implants (e.g., artificial joints, e.g., knees, hips, etc., can loosen due to osteoclast activity driven by local inflammation) (see, e.g., Childs, L. M., et al., 2001 , Journal of Bone and Mineral Research , Vol. 16, No. 2, pp. 338-347).
  • prosthetic implants e.g., artificial joints, e.g., knees, hips, etc.
  • the treatment is treatment of osteopetrosis, osteoarthritis, or ectopic bone formation.
  • treatment pertains generally to treatment and therapy, whether of a human or an animal (e.g., in veterinary applications), in which some desired therapeutic effect is achieved, for example, the inhibition of the progress of the condition, and includes a reduction in the rate of progress, a halt in the rate of progress, alleviatiation of symptoms of the condition, amelioration of the condition, and cure of the condition.
  • Treatment as a prophylactic measure i.e., prophylaxis
  • use with patients who have not yet developed the condition, but who are at risk of developing the condition is encompassed by the term “treatment.”
  • treatment For example, use with perimenopausal women who may not yet have osteoporosis, but who are at risk of osteoporosis, is encompassed by the term “treatment.”
  • terapéuticaally-effective amount pertains to that amount of a compound, or a material, composition or dosage form comprising a compound, which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, when administered in accordance with a desired treatment regimen.
  • treatment includes combination treatments and therapies, in which two or more treatments or therapies are combined, for example, sequentially or simultaneously.
  • treatments and therapies include, but are not limited to, chemotherapy (the administration of active agents, including, e.g., drugs, antibodies (e.g., as in immunotherapy), prodrugs (e.g., as in photodynamic therapy, GDEPT, ADEPT, etc.); surgery; radiation therapy; and gene therapy.
  • APSAC compounds described herein may also be used as cell culture additives to inhibit immune cell function, for example, to inhibit the survival, formation, and/or activity of macrophages, T-cells, or other cells involved in the immune response.
  • APSAC compounds as described herein, may also be used as cell culture additives, for example, to inhibit osteoclasts, for example, to inhibit the survival, formation, and/or activity of osteoclasts.
  • APSAC compounds described herein may also be used as part of an in vitro assay, for example, in order to determine whether a candidate host is likely to benefit from treatment with the compound in question.
  • APSAC compounds described herein may also be used as a standard, for example, in an assay, in order to identify other active compounds, other osteoclast inhibitors, etc.
  • kits comprising (a) an APSAC compound as described herein, or a composition comprising an APSAC compound as described herein, e.g., preferably provided in a suitable container and/or with suitable packaging; and (b) instructions for use, e.g., written instructions on how to administer the compound or composition.
  • the written instructions may also include a list of indications for which the APSAC compound is a suitable treatment.
  • the APSAC compound or pharmaceutical composition comprising the APSAC compound may be administered to a subject by any convenient route of administration, whether systemically/peripherally or topically (i.e., at the site of desired action).
  • Routes of administration include, but are not limited to, oral (e.g., by ingestion); buccal; sublingual; transdermal (including, e.g., by a patch, plaster, etc.); transmucosal (including, e.g., by a patch, plaster, etc.); intranasal (e.g., by nasal spray); ocular (e.g., by eyedrops); pulmonary (e.g., by inhalation or insufflation therapy using, e.g., via an aerosol, e.g., through the mouth or nose); rectal (e.g., by suppository or enema); vaginal (e.g., by pessary); parenteral, for example, by injection, including subcutaneous, intradermal, intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intracardiac, intrathecal, intraspinal, intracapsular, subcapsular, intraorbital, intraperitoneal, intratracheal, subcuticular
  • the subject/patient may be a chordate, a vertebrate, a mammal, a placental mammal, a marsupial (e.g., kangaroo, wombat), a rodent (e.g., a guinea pig, a hamster, a rat, a mouse), murine (e.g., a mouse), a lagomorph (e.g., a rabbit), avian (e.g., a bird), canine (e.g., a dog), feline (e.g., a cat), equine (e.g., a horse), porcine (e.g., a pig), ovine (e.g., a sheep), bovine (e.g., a cow), a primate, simian (e.g., a monkey or ape), a monkey (e.g., marmoset, baboon), an ape (e.g
  • the subject/patient may be any of its forms of development, for example, a foetus.
  • the subject/patient is a human.
  • the APSAC compound While it is possible for the APSAC compound to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., composition, preparation, medicament) comprising at least one APSAC compound, as described herein, together with one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients well known to those skilled in the art, including, but not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, diluents, excipients, adjuvants, fillers, buffers, preservatives, anti-oxidants, lubricants, stabilisers, solubilisers, surfactants (e.g., wetting agents), masking agents, colouring agents, flavouring agents, and sweetening agents.
  • the formulation may further comprise other active agents, for example, other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.
  • the present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions, as defined above, and methods of making a pharmaceutical composition comprising admixing at least one APSAC compound, as described herein, together with one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients well known to those skilled in the art, e.g., carriers, diluents, excipients, etc. If formulated as discrete units (e.g., tablets, etc.), each unit contains a predetermined amount (dosage) of the compound.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable pertains to compounds, ingredients, materials, compositions, dosage forms, etc., which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of the subject in question (e.g., human) without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • Each carrier, diluent, excipient, etc. must also be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation.
  • Suitable carriers, diluents, excipients, etc. can be found in standard pharmaceutical texts, for example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th edition, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1990; and Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, 5th edition, 2005.
  • the formulations may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the compound with a carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the compound with carriers (e.g., liquid carriers, finely divided solid carrier, etc.), and then shaping the product, if necessary.
  • carriers e.g., liquid carriers, finely divided solid carrier, etc.
  • the formulation may be prepared to provide for rapid or slow release; immediate, delayed, timed, or sustained release; or a combination thereof.
  • Formulations may suitably be in the form of liquids, solutions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), suspensions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil), elixirs, syrups, electuaries, mouthwashes, drops, tablets (including, e.g., coated tablets), granules, powders, losenges, pastilles, capsules (including, e.g., hard and soft gelatin capsules), cachets, pills, ampoules, boluses, suppositories, pessaries, tinctures, gels, pastes, ointments, creams, lotions, oils, foams, sprays, mists, or aerosols.
  • solutions e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous
  • suspensions e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous
  • Formulations may suitably be provided as a patch, adhesive plaster, bandage, dressing, or the like which is impregnated with one or more compounds and optionally one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients, including, for example, penetration, permeation, and absorption enhancers. Formulations may also suitably be provided in the form of a depot or reservoir.
  • the compound may be dissolved in, suspended in, or admixed with one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients.
  • the compound may be presented in a liposome or other microparticulate which is designed to target the compound, for example, to blood components or one or more organs.
  • Formulations suitable for oral administration include liquids, solutions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), suspensions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil), elixirs, syrups, electuaries, tablets, granules, powders, capsules, cachets, pills, ampoules, boluses.
  • Formulations suitable for buccal administration include mouthwashes, losenges, pastilles, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, depots, and reservoirs.
  • Losenges typically comprise the compound in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth.
  • Pastilles typically comprise the compound in an inert matrix, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia.
  • Mouthwashes typically comprise the compound in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • Formulations suitable for sublingual administration include tablets, losenges, pastilles, capsules, and pills.
  • Formulations suitable for oral transmucosal administration include liquids, solutions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), suspensions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil), mouthwashes, losenges, pastilles, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, depots, and reservoirs.
  • solutions e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous
  • suspensions e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous
  • emulsions e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil
  • mouthwashes e.g., losenges, pastilles, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, depots, and reservoirs.
  • Formulations suitable for non-oral transmucosal administration include liquids, solutions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), suspensions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil), suppositories, pessaries, gels, pastes, ointments, creams, lotions, oils, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, depots, and reservoirs.
  • solutions e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous
  • suspensions e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous
  • emulsions e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil
  • suppositories e.g., pessaries, gels, pastes, ointments, creams, lotions, oils, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, depots, and reservoirs.
  • Formulations suitable for transdermal administration include gels, pastes, ointments, creams, lotions, and oils, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, bandages, dressings, depots, and reservoirs.
  • Tablets may be made by conventional means, e.g., compression or moulding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the compound in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with one or more binders (e.g., povidone, gelatin, acacia, sorbitol, tragacanth, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose); fillers or diluents (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc, silica); disintegrants (e.g., sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose); surface-active or dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate); preservatives (e.g., methyl p-hydroxybenzoate, propyl
  • Moulded tablets may be made by moulding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the compound therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile.
  • Tablets may optionally be provided with a coating, for example, to affect release, for example an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach.
  • Ointments are typically prepared from the compound and a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base.
  • Creams are typically prepared from the compound and an oil-in-water cream base.
  • the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least about 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane-1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • the topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the compound through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethylsulfoxide and related analogues.
  • Emulsions are typically prepared from the compound and an oily phase, which may optionally comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), or it may comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil.
  • an emulsifier also known as an emulgent
  • a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabiliser. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat.
  • the emulsifier(s) with or without stabiliser(s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax
  • the wax together with the oil and/or fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations.
  • Suitable emulgents and emulsion stabilisers include Tween 60, Span 80, cetostearyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.
  • suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties, since the solubility of the compound in most oils likely to be used in pharmaceutical emulsion formulations may be very low.
  • the cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non-staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers.
  • Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required. Alternatively, high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils can be used.
  • Formulations suitable for intranasal administration, where the carrier is a liquid include, for example, nasal spray, nasal drops, or by aerosol administration by nebuliser, include aqueous or oily solutions of the compound.
  • Formulations suitable for intranasal administration, where the carrier is a solid include, for example, those presented as a coarse powder having a particle size, for example, in the range of about 20 to about 500 microns which is administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e., by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose.
  • Formulations suitable for pulmonary administration include those presented as an aerosol spray from a pressurised pack, with the use of a suitable propellant, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichoro-tetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide, or other suitable gases.
  • a suitable propellant such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichoro-tetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide, or other suitable gases.
  • Formulations suitable for ocular administration include eye drops wherein the compound is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the compound.
  • Formulations suitable for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising, for example, natural or hardened oils, waxes, fats, semi-liquid or liquid polyols, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate; or as a solution or suspension for treatment by enema.
  • a suitable base comprising, for example, natural or hardened oils, waxes, fats, semi-liquid or liquid polyols, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate; or as a solution or suspension for treatment by enema.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the compound, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous or non-aqueous, isotonic, pyrogen-free, sterile liquids (e.g., solutions, suspensions), in which the compound is dissolved, suspended, or otherwise provided (e.g., in a liposome or other microparticulate).
  • sterile liquids e.g., solutions, suspensions
  • Such liquids may additional contain other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients, such as anti-oxidants, buffers, preservatives, stabilisers, bacteriostats, suspending agents, thickening agents, and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood (or other relevant bodily fluid) of the intended recipient.
  • excipients include, for example, water, alcohols, polyols, glycerol, vegetable oils, and the like.
  • suitable isotonic carriers for use in such formulations include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Solution, or Lactated Ringer's Injection.
  • concentration of the compound in the liquid is from about 1 ng/mL to about 100 ⁇ g/mL, for example from about 10 ng/mL to about 10 ⁇ g/mL, for example from about 10 ng/mL to about 1 ⁇ g/mL.
  • the formulations may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilised) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use.
  • sterile liquid carrier for example water for injections, immediately prior to use.
  • Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets.
  • APSAC compounds can vary from patient to patient. Determining the optimal dosage will generally involve the balancing of the level of therapeutic benefit against any risk or deleterious side effects.
  • the selected dosage level will depend on a variety of factors including, but not limited to, the activity of the particular APSAC compound, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the APSAC compound, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds, and/or materials used in combination, the severity of the condition, and the species, sex, age, weight, condition, general health, and prior medical history of the patient.
  • the amount of APSAC compound and route of administration will ultimately be at the discretion of the physician, veterinarian, or clinician, although generally the dosage will be selected to achieve local concentrations at the site of action which achieve the desired effect without causing substantial harmful or deleterious side-effects.
  • Administration can be effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently (e.g., in divided doses at appropriate intervals) throughout the course of treatment. Methods of determining the most effective means and dosage of administration are well known to those of skill in the art and will vary with the formulation used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target cell(s) being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations can be carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician, veterinarian, or clinician.
  • a suitable dose of the APSAC compound is in the range of about 10 ⁇ g to about 250 mg (more typically about 100 ⁇ g to about 25 mg) per kilogram body weight of the subject per day.
  • the compound is a salt, an ester, an amide, a prodrug, or the like
  • the amount administered is calculated on the basis of the parent compound and so the actual weight to be used is increased proportionately.
  • ABD598 (1.0 g) was dissolved in a mixture of toluene (15 mL) and ethanol (15 mL). 2,4-Difluorophenylboronic acid (1 g) was added followed by (PPh 3 ) 4 Pd (0.15 g). The mixture was stirred vigorously under N 2 and 2 M Na 2 CO 3 (15 mL) added. The mixture was refluxed with stirring for 3 hours under an atmosphere of N 2 . The organic solvents were removed under vacuum, the residue dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water and saturated NaCl solution.
  • 2,4-Difluorophenylboronic acid (15 g, 129 mmol) was added to a solution of bromobenzene (19.8 g, 126 mmol) in DME (500 mL). To this was added a solution of sodium carbonate (55.8 g, 520 mmol) in water (260 mL). The solution was degassed by bubbling argon through the mixture and then stirred under argon. Pd(dppf)Cl 2 (1.5 g, 2.1 mmol) was added and the mixture heated overnight at 90° C. under argon. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and water (150 mL) and ethyl acetate (500 mL) were added.
  • 2,4-Difluorobiphenyl (21.2 g, 111 mmol) was dissolved in chloroform (120 mL) and chlorosulfonic acid (12.5 mL, 188 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue taken up into EtOAc (100 mL) and washed with water (3 ⁇ 25 mL). The organics were shaken with brine, whereupon a flocculent solid formed. This was filtered and washed with EtOAc and dried to give 2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonic acid as an off-white solid (12.1 g).
  • a solution of ABD776a (100 mg, 0.24 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was cooled to 0° C. under argon and 1 M LiAlH 4 in THF (1.22 mL, 1.22 mmol) was added by syringe. The mixture was stirred overnight, allowing it to warm to room temperature. The solution was then cooled to 0° C. before saturated NH 4 Cl (5 mL) and EtOAc (20 mL) were added. The mixture was filtered through Celite and the layers separated.
  • Jones' reagent was prepared by dissolving CrO 3 (1.33 g, 13.3 mmol) in concentrated H 2 SO 4 (1.15 mL) and diluting the mixture up to 5 mL with water.
  • a solution of ABD598 (390 mg, 1.17 mmol) in acetone (15 mL) was stirred at room temperature and Jones' reagent was added dropwise until an orange colour persisted.
  • TLC indicated complete consumption of the starting material and the formation of a new, less polar, compound.
  • the mixture was filtered through Celite, the solvent was evaporated and the residue taken up in EtOAc (50 mL). The solution was washed with water (2 ⁇ 10 mL) and 10% aqueous Na 2 S 2 O 3 (2 ⁇ 10 mL) and dried over MgSO 4 . Evaporation of the solvent gave the title compound as a white solid (390 mg).
  • a solution of ABD777b (205 mg, 0.62 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was cooled to 0° C. under argon.
  • 1 M LS-Selectride in THF (1.32 mL, 1.32 mmol) was added by syringe and the solution was stirred for 1 hour.
  • Water (1 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes before being diluted with EtOAc (20 mL) and 1 M HCl (4 mL). The layers were separated and the organic phase was washed with water (5 mL) and brine (5 mL) and dried over MgSO 4 .
  • ABD777a 160 mg, 0.48 mmol
  • 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid 113 mg, 0.72 mmol
  • 1 M Na 2 CO 3 solution 1 mL, 1 mmol
  • Pd(dppf)Cl 2 17 mg, 0.02 mmol
  • the mixture was cooled, poured into EtOAc (30 mL) and washed with water (5 mL) and brine (5 mL).
  • a solution of ABD781a (123 mg, 0.30 mmol) in dry THF (3 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and 1 M LiAlH 4 in THF (1.5 mL, 1.5 mmol) was added by syringe. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours, whilst warming to room temperature. Ice and water were then added and the mixture was adjusted to pH 2 with 2 M HCl and extracted with EtOAc (4 ⁇ 10 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine (10 mL), dried over MgSO 4 and evaporated.
  • a solution of ABD776a (100 mg, 0.24 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. 3 M Methylmagnesium bromide solution in Et 2 O (25 ⁇ L, 0.75 mmol) was added by syringe and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours, allowing it to warm to room temperature. The solution was cooled to 0° C. and saturated NH 4 Cl solution (2 mL) was added, followed by water to dissolve the solids. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 10 mL) and the combined extracts were washed with brine (5 mL) and water (5 mL) and dried over MgSO 4 .
  • a solution of ABD781a 300 mg, 0.73 mmol in dry THF (10 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and 3 M methylmagnesium bromide in Et 2 O (0.97 mL, 2.93 mmol) was added by syringe. The ice bath was removed and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Saturated NH 4 Cl (2 mL) was then added and the mixture was stirred a further 10 minutes before being diluted with water (10 mL) and diethyl ether (20 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with diethyl ether (2 ⁇ 10 mL).
  • a solution of ABD786 (200 mg, 0.55 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was stirred at room temperature and 2 M dimethylamine in THF (0.55 mL, 1.10 mmol) was added by syringe.
  • the solution was cooled to 0° C. under argon and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (150 mg, 0.71 mmol) was added in one portion.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and then at room temperature overnight.
  • TLC indicated incomplete reaction so further 2 M dimethylamine in THF (0.5 mL, 1 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (100 mg, 0.47 mmol) were added. After a further 24 hours, 2 M NaOH (3 mL) was added.
  • Ethyl cis-2-aminocyclopentanecarboxylate hydrochloride (390 mg, 2.0 mmol) and 2′,4′-difluorobiphenylsulfonyl chloride (480 mg, 1.67 mmol) were stirred in DCM (5 mL) and pyridine (400 ⁇ L) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, after which TLC indicated both starting materials were still present. DMAP (10 mg) and additional pyridine (1 mL) were added and stirring was continued for a further 24 hours, when TLC indicated no starting materials remained and a new compound had formed. The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and water (5 mL) and conc.
  • N-(cis-4-(2,4-Dimethoxybenzylamino)cyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (see ABD787a) (52 mg, 0.10 mmol) was stirred in acetonitrile (3 mL) and water (1 mL) and ceric ammonium nitrate (144 mg, 0.26 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 50° C. overnight and then diluted with EtOAc (15 mL) and washed with water (2 ⁇ 5 mL). The washings were extracted with EtOAc (5 mL) and the combined organics were dried over MgSO 4 .
  • a solution of ABD813a (105 mg, 0.27 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and LiAlH 4 (1 M in THF, 1.33 mL, 1.33 mmol) was added by syringe. After 5 minutes the ice bath was removed and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. After cooling back to 0° C., the reaction was quenched by adding Na 2 SO 4 10.H 2 O ( ⁇ 500 mg) cautiously. Once bubbling had stopped the mixture was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL) and stirred for 1 hour at room temperature before being filtered, rinsing the solids well with EtOAc.
  • a solution of ABD786 (250 mg, 0.68 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was stirred under argon and methylamine (2 M in THF, 1.35 mL) was added by syringe. The solution was stirred for 1 hour and then STAB (360 mg, 1.7 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. TLC indicated starting material to still be present, and so further methylamine (2 M in THF, 1.35 mL) and STAB (360 mg, 1.7 mmol) and a drop of acetic acid were added and stirring was continued for a further 3 days.
  • a solution of ABD786 (250 mg, 0.68 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was stirred under argon and ethylamine (2 M in THF, 1.35 mL) was added by syringe. The solution was stirred for 1 hour and then STAB (360 mg, 1.7 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. TLC indicated starting material to still be present, and so further ethylamine (2 M in THF, 1.35 mL) and STAB (360 mg, 1.7 mmol) and a drop of acetic acid were added and stirring was continued for a further 3 days.
  • ABD786 (450 mg, 1.23 mmol) was stirred in DCM (5 mL) and i PrNH 2 (160 ⁇ L, 110 mg, 1.85 mmol) was added and the solution was stirred overnight at room temperature. It was then diluted with further DCM (5 mL) and STAB (1.30 g, 6.15 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 2 hours. 2 M NaOH (aq., 7 mL) and EtOAc (30 mL) were added and the mixture was stirred for a further 30 minutes before the layers were separated.
  • a solution of methylamine (2 M in THF, 5.8 mL, 11.6 mmol) in dry DCM (15 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and the solution of the acid chloride was added by cannula, resulting in the formation of a precipitate.
  • a solution of ABD824a (240 mg, 0.59 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was cooled to 0° C. under argon and BH 3 (1 M in THF, 1.8 mL, 1.8 mmol) was added by syringe. The solution was stirred overnight, allowing it to warm to room temperature, after which TLC indicated that starting material was still present, as well as a more polar compound. Further BH 3 (1 M in THF, 1.0 mL, 1.0 mmol) was added and the solution was heated at reflux for 3 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction was quenched with NH 4 Cl (sat. aq., 5 mL) and water was added to dissolve the solids.
  • ABD598 500 mg, 1.5 mmol
  • bis(pinacolato)diboron 420 mg, 1.65 mmol
  • KOAc 294 mg, 3 mmol
  • Pd(dppf)Cl 2 55 mg, 0.08 mmol
  • DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide
  • the reaction mixture was then cooled to room temperature and poured into water (40 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 20 mL). The combined organics were washed with water (20 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) and filtered. Evaporation gave a brown solid (555 mg), containing both the boronic acid and the ester, which was used without further purification.
  • ABD836a (278 mg, 0.92 mmol) was dissolved in DME (4 mL) and 2-bromo-3,5-dichloropyridine (171 mg, 0.76 mmol), Pd(dppf)Cl 2 (23 mg, 5 mol %) and Na 2 CO 3 (2 M soln, 1.15 mL, 2.30 mmol) were added.
  • the mixture was placed in an ultrasonic bath under a stream of argon for 5 minutes. It was then placed in a preheated oil bath (90° C.) for 1.75 hours. After this time, the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and poured into water (80 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 60 mL).
  • a solution ABD836a (278 mg, 0.92 mmol) in DME (4 mL) was stirred and 2,5-dichloropyrimidine (112 mg, 0.76 mmol), Pd(dppf)Cl 2 (23 mg, 5 mol %) and Na 2 CO 3 (2 M soln, 1.15 mL, 2.30 mmol) were added.
  • the mixture was placed in an ultrasonic bath under a stream of argon for 5 minutes. It was then placed in a preheated oil bath (90° C.) for 1 hour. After this time, the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and poured into water (80 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 60 mL).
  • a solution of ABD836a (225 mg, 0.78 mmol) in DME (4 mL) was stirred at room temperature and 5-bromopyrimidine (99 mg, 0.63 mmol), Pd(dppf)Cl 2 (23 mg, 0.03 mmol) and Na 2 CO 3 (2 M aq., 0.95 mL) were added.
  • the mixture was placed in an ultrasonic bath under a stream of argon for 5 minutes and then in an oil bath that had been pre-heated to 90° C.
  • the reaction mixture was heated for 1 hour and then cooled to room temperature, diluted with water (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 10 mL).

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Transplantation (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
  • Pyridine Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention pertains generally to the field of therapeutic compounds, and more specifically to certain aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds of the following formula (collectively referred to herein as “APSAC compounds”). The present invention also pertains to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds, and the use of such compounds and compositions, both in vitro and in vivo, in treatment, for example, of inflammation and/or joint destruction and/or bone loss; of disorders mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system; of inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like; of disorders associated with bone loss, such as bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activity in rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, cancer-associated bone disease, Paget's disease and the like, etc.; and of cancer, such as a haematological malignancy, a solid tumour, etc.
Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00001

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/886,799, filed May 3, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,822,507. U.S. application Ser. No. 13/886,799 is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/063,956, filed Mar. 15, 2011, U.S. Pat. No. 8,435,968. U.S. application Ser. No. 13/063,956 is a 35 U.S.C. §371 national phase application of PCT/GB2009/002221, filed Sep. 18, 2009 (WO 2010/032009), entitled “Aryl-Phenyl-Sulfonamido-Cycloalkyl Compounds and Their Use”. PCT/GB2009/002221 is a non-provisional application of U.S. provisional patent application No. 61/098,271 filed Sep. 19, 2008 and United Kingdom patent application number 0817207.4 filed Sep. 19, 2008. The contents of each of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
    • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The present invention pertains generally to the field of therapeutic compounds, and more specifically to certain aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds (collectively referred to herein as “APSAC compounds”). The present invention also pertains to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds, and the use of such compounds and compositions, both in vitro and in vivo, in treatment, for example, of inflammation and/or joint destruction and/or bone loss; of disorders mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system; of inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like; of disorders associated with bone loss, such as bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activity in rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, cancer-associated bone disease, Paget's disease and the like, etc.; and of cancer, such as a haematological malignancy, a solid tumour, etc.
    • BACKGROUND
  • A number of patents and publications are cited herein in order to more fully describe and disclose the invention and the state of the art to which the invention pertains. Each of these references is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety into the present disclosure, to the same extent as if each individual reference was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
  • Throughout this specification, including the claims which follow, unless the context requires otherwise, the word “comprise,” and variations such as “comprises” and “comprising,” will be understood to imply the inclusion of a stated integer or step or group of integers or steps but not the exclusion of any other integer or step or group of integers or steps.
  • It must be noted that, as used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to “a pharmaceutical carrier” includes mixtures of two or more such carriers, and the like.
  • Ranges are often expressed herein as from “about” one particular value, and/or to “about” another particular value. When such a range is expressed, another embodiment includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by the use of the antecedent “about,” it will be understood that the particular value forms another embodiment.
  • This disclosure includes information that may be useful in understanding the present invention. It is not an admission that any of the information provided herein is prior art or relevant to the presently claimed invention, or that any publication specifically or implicitly referenced is prior art.
    • Rheumatoid Arthritis
  • Rheumatoid arthritis (RA) is a chronic inflammatory disease characterised by painful swelling, stiffness, loss of movement and the destruction of cartilage and bone. RA is characterised by an inflammation of the synovial lining of multiple joints and commonly affects the joints of the wrist and hands and may also affect the elbows, shoulders, hips, neck and knees; the ultimate hallmark of RA is joint destruction. RA is a common disease, estimated to affect up to 1% of adults in the developed world, with women more than twice as likely to be affected and over 30% of patients likely to become severely disabled within 20 years (see, e.g., Feldmann et al., 2006). RA is one of the most important causes of disability in the western world and is associated with a significant reduction in quality of life as well as increased mortality if left untreated. The disease can start at any age, with individuals aged between 40 and 70 most commonly affected.
  • The exact cause of RA remains unclear, but is highly complex and may involve the combination of a number of factors which lead to the development of autoantibodies, formation of immune complexes, production of pro-inflammatory cytokines, angiogenesis and eventual bone and cartilage loss (see, e.g., Klareskog et al, 2006; Ziff et al, 1990; Weissmann et al, 2006; Firestein et al, 2005). These factors include an abnormal immune response caused by reduced self tolerance or a biological trigger such as reaction to environmental factors, infectious agents, or hormonal stimulus (see, e.g., Klareskog et al, 2006); antibodies to the Fc fragment of IgG, known as rheumatoid factor, are present in 60-80% of adults with RA (see, e.g., Weissmann et al, 2006) but it is not known whether this factor is responsible for initiating the inflammatory cascade or is generated at a later stage and propagates the process (see, e.g., Weissmann et al, 2006); there is also a notable genetic predisposition to the disease, as shown by the presence of HLA-DR4 antibody in 70% of patients (see, e.g., Klareskog et al, 2006).
  • At the cellular level, development of RA usually commences with T-cells infiltrating the synovial membrane lining the affected joint; this then leads to the activation of macrophages, monocytes and synovial fibroblasts (see, e.g., Firestein, 1996) by way of cell-cell contact and release of various cytokines, including TNFα and IL-1 (see, e.g., Feldmann, 1996). Activation of these cells leads to the overproduction of a range of pro-inflammatory cytokines, of which the most important are TNFα, IL-1 and IL-6 (see, e.g., Brennan et al, 1996; McInnes et al, 2005). These pro-inflammatory cytokines are then instrumental in orchestrating several complex signal transduction cascades, including the NFκB, MAPK and Jak/STAT pathways (see, e.g., Firestein et al, 1999) which lead to the induction of genes coding for various products that propagate the inflammatory response and also promote tissue destruction. These products include tissue-degrading enzymes such as collagenases, matrix metalloproteases, cathepsins, and other pro-inflammatory factors such as selectins, integrins, leukotrienes, prostaglandins, chemokines, and other cytokines. Furthermore, TNFα and IL-1 also induce RANKL expression.
  • RANKL is an essential factor for the generation of osteoclasts (see, e.g., Tanaka et al, 2003; Roodman, 2006), and upregulated RANKL-production leads to increased osteoclast differentiation and ultimately bone destruction (see, e.g., Tanaka et al, 2003; Roodman, 2006). The inflammatory response leads to the accumulation of many leukocytes and immune factor populations within the affected joint and also to hyperplasia of the Type-A and Type-B synoviocytes (see, e.g., Firestein et al, 2005), leading to thickening and vascularisation of the synovium into a destructive and aggressive tissue known as a pannus. The pannus contains both osteoclasts, which destroy bone, and metalloproteases, which continue the destruction of cartilage.
    • Treatment of Rheumatoid Arthritis
  • Early therapies for RA focussed on controlling the symptoms of the disease, mainly by reduction of inflammation, rather than retarding disease progression. These drugs included NSAIDs such as aspirin, diclofenac and naproxen and, until recently, the COX-2 selective drugs Celebrex® and Vioxx® were also widely used. Inflammation was further controlled by glucocorticoids, and their combination with NSAIDs provided reasonably effective short-term control of the inflammation. More recently, a more aggressive approach to treating RA has been introduced starting at disease onset, using so-called disease-modifying anti-rheumatic drugs (DMARDs), which act to slow or even prevent disease progression. These include a number of older drugs, including gold salts; sulfasalazine; antimalarials such as hydroxychloroquine; D-penicillamine; immunosuppressants such as mycophenolic acid, azathioprine, cyclosporine A, tacrolimus and sirolimus; minocycline; leflunomide; and most importantly, methotrexate (see, e.g., Smolen et al, 2003).
  • Methotrexate is now the gold-standard therapy for clinical trial comparisons, and is generally used in combination with newer therapies. It is effective in most patients but, in common with all of the above agents, has significant gastrointestinal side effects, which lead to roughly 50% of patients eventually having to cease treatment with methotrexate (see, e.g., Mount et al, 2005). A further drawback of these older DMARDs is the length of time taken for the drug to start acting, ranging from weeks with methoxtrexate, to months with gold salts. Whilst full remissions only occur in about a quarter of patients, for those showing no effect it is not generally possible to stop therapy without suffering the risk of a more violent disease rebound (see, e.g., Smolen et al, 2003). In recent years, the treatment of RA has been revolutionised by the advent of biological agents which target specific inflammatory pathways. The first and most important of these are the anti-tumour necrosis factor (anti-TNF) agents (see, e.g., Elliott et al, 1994).
    • The Role of TNFα in RA
  • As discussed above, the TNF superfamily of receptors and ligands plays a key role in the causation of inflammation and associated local and systemic bone loss. TNFα production within the joint may in fact play the pivotal role in orchestrating the production of other factors which leads to the persistence of inflammation and tissue damage (see, e.g., Feldmann et al, 2001; Brennan et al, 1999; Brennan, 1992). The importance of TNFα in RA is highlighted by the finding that antibodies blocking TNFα can prevent inflammation in animal models of RA, and that anti-TNFα therapy is currently the most effective treatment for RA (see, e.g., Elliott et al, 1994; Feldmann et al, 1994; Joosten et al 1996, Klareskog et al, 2006). However, there is evidence that there are some TNFα-independent effects of IL-1 in RA, most notably bone destruction (see, e.g., van den Berg et al, 1999; van den Berg et al, 2002).
  • TNFα is a cytokine that effects many different functions, including the alteration of tissue remodelling, changes to the permeability of the epithelial cell barrier, activation of macrophages, up-regulation of adhesion molecules, recruitment of other immune response effectors and, most importantly in RA, it instigates the signalling cascade which leads to the activation of the transcription factors NFκB and AP-1 (see, e.g., Liu, 2005; Baud et al, 1999). Binding of TNFα and IL-1 to their respective receptors leads to the recruitment of downstream signal transducers called TRAFs. Further kinases are recruited by the TRAFs, and the resulting kinase complex activates the MAP-kinase pathway, ultimately leading to activation of AP-1, and the phosphorylation of IκB kinase. IκB is the inhibitor of NFκB, which acts by preventing translocation of NFκB to the nucleus. Phosphorylation of IκB by IκB kinase leads to degradation of IκB. Once IκB has been degraded, NFκB migrates to the nucleus, where it promotes transcription of anti-apoptotic genes, which promote survival of T and B-cells, thereby prolonging the immune response. This prolongation of the inflammatory response is central to the chronic nature of RA. The importance of NFκB activation is demonstrated by the fact that inhibition of NFκB activity by inhibitory peptides can prevent arthritis in animal models of RA (see, e.g., Jimi et al, 2004).
    • Anti-TNFα Therapy
  • Anti-TNFα therapy represents the market-leading therapies for RA, and is performed either with neutralising antibodies such as infliximab (Remicade® J&J and Schering Plough) and adalimumab (Humira®, Abbott) or decoy receptors such as etanercept (Enbrel® Amgen and Wyeth), both which represent validated and highly effective treatments for RA. Anti-TNFα biologicals are already licensed for RA, Crohn's disease, and psoriasis. A number of other inflammatory and autoimmune disorders are also being investigated as potential targets. Other approaches to blocking the action of TNFα include the pegylated anti-TNFα fragment certolizumab (Cimzia®, UCB); inhibition of proximal signalling intermediates such as MAP kinase; interference with the synthesis of TNFα via inhibition of TNFα converting enzyme (TACE); and inhibition of the metalloproteases responsible for cleaving TNFα from the cell surface (see, e.g., Smolen et al, 2003; Mount et al, 2005).
    • Other Inhibitors of NFκB Activation
  • As described above, the binding of IL-1 and RANKL to their receptors also initiates a signalling cascade, which eventually leads to the activation of NFκB and subsequent inflammatory response. The efficacy of inhibitors of these ligands has been validated by the use of the IL-1 receptor antagonist anakinra (Kineret® Amgen) for the treatment of RA, and the completion of clinical trials for the monoclonal antibody against RANKL AMG-162 (Denosumab® Amgen) for osteoporosis (it is also in clinical trials for RA and psoriasis).
    • Other Common Inflammatory Diseases Mediated by TNFα
  • There are several other common inflammatory diseases in which TNFα has been shown to play a major role and in which TNFα inhibitors have found therapeutic use. These include inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) and psoriasis.
  • IBD is an inflammatory disorder of the gut affecting about 0.25% of the population in the western world, of which the two main forms are: ulcerative colitis (UC), in which the lining of the colon becomes inflamed and ulcerated; and Crohn's disease (CD), which can occur anywhere within the gastrointestinal tract, but most often the ileum, and commonly involves inflammation of the entire gut wall. Common symptoms of IBD are bloody diarrhoea and abdominal pain.
  • Psoriasis is an inflammatory response of the skin affecting 1-3% of the population in the western world. The disease is characterised by raised, red, scaly plaques on the skin, which may be itchy and also cause significant psychological distress by their unsightly nature. A further complication of psoriasis is the development of psoriatic arthritis, an inflammatory arthritis of the joints, in up to 40% of patients, which develops on average 10 years after the first symptoms of skin disease are seen (see, e.g., Gottlieb, 2005).
  • As with RA, the aetiology of IBD and psoriasis are unknown and may involve a complex combination of infectious agents, environmental, and genetic factors, generating an inappropriate and prolonged inflammatory response.
  • Treatment of IBD and psoriasis has followed a similar pattern to that of RA, with the past use of immunoregulatory agents such as NSAIDs, methotrexate, cyclosporine, steroids, and antimetabolites such as 6-mercaptopurine for IBD (see, e.g., Korzenik et al, 2006) and methotrexate and cyclosporine for psoriasis (see, e.g., Gottlieb, 2005). The treatment of both has been revolutionised by the advent of biological agents, in particular those which block TNFα signalling. Etanercept is licensed for the treatment of psoriasis and psoriatic arthritis; both infliximab and adalimumab are licensed for psoriatic arthritis, IBD, and psoriasis.
    • Cancer
  • There is growing evidence that activation of NFκB can play a major role in the promotion and progression of both haematological malignancies, such as myeloma and lymphomas, and solid tumours, such as breast, prostate and lung cancer (see, e.g., Baud and Karin, 2009). There is also rising awareness of the role and importance of inflammation in cancer and in the development of resistance to radiotherapy and to chemotherapeutic agents, and it has been suggested that inflammation is in fact one of the basic hallmarks of cancer (see, e.g., Mantovani, 2009). Improving the efficacy of anti-cancer treatments by prevention of NFκB activation is therefore a promising strategy to augment existing therapeutic regimes and is currently under investigation, most notably for the treatment of multiple myeloma.
  • Defects in the normal apoptotic pathways are also implicated in the development and progression of tumour cell growth. Apoptosis (programmed cell death) plays a key role in the removal of abnormal cells; defects in the signalling cascades, which would normally lead to its induction, play a key role in oncogenesis. Radiotherapy and many chemotherapeutic agents act by causing cellular damage, which would normally induce apoptosis; defects in the pathway will therefore also reduce the effectiveness of such agents. The most important effector molecules in the signalling pathway leading to apoptosis are known as the caspases, which may be triggered by a number of stimuli, including TNFα binding to its receptor. Mutations in the genes which encode for the caspases have been found in a number of tumour types, including gastric, breast, renal cell and cervical cancers as well as commonly in T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma and basal cell ameloblastomas (see, e.g., Philchenkov et al., 2004). Compounds which activate caspases, and thus sensitise cells to apoptosis, would be highly effective as cancer therapies either as single agents or in enhancing the effectiveness of exisiting cancer chemotherapy and radiotherapy.
    • Common Bone Diseases
  • Osteoporosis is a common disease characterised by reduced bone density, deterioration of bone tissue, and an increased risk of fracture. Many factors contribute to the pathogenesis of osteoporosis including poor diet, lack of exercise, smoking, and excessive alcohol intake. Osteoporosis may also arise in association with inflammatory diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis, endocrine diseases such as thyrotoxicosis, and with certain drug treatments such as treatment with glucocorticoids. However one of the most important factors in the pathogenesis of osteoporosis is heredity.
  • Paget's disease of bone is a common condition of unknown cause, characterised by increased bone turnover and disorganised bone remodelling, with areas of increased osteoclastic and osteoblast activity. Although Pagetic bone is often denser than normal, the abnormal architecture causes the bone to be mechanically weak, resulting in bone deformity and increased susceptibility to pathological fracture.
  • Many types of cancer affect bone. Cancer-associated bone disease can be manifest by the occurrence of hypercalcaemia or the development of osteolytic and/or osteosclerotic metastases. Increased osteoclastic bone resorption plays a key role in the pathogenesis of both conditions. Whilst almost any cancer can be complicated by bone metastases, the most common sources are multiple myeloma, breast carcinoma, and prostate carcinoma. The most common tumours associated with hypercalcaemia are multiple myeloma, breast carcinoma, and lung carcinoma.
  • RANKL signalling has been shown to play a major role in osteoclast over-activity and a consequent increase in bone loss (see, e.g., Tanaka et al, 2003; Roodman, 2006). The use of drugs which affect this pathway has been validated by the completion of clinical trials of the monoclonal antibody against RANKL AMG-162 (Denosumab® Amgen) for the treatment of osteoporosis/multiple myeloma.
  • As described previously, bone loss also plays a major role in the pathophysiology of rheumatoid arthritis and drugs which prevent activation of the signalling pathways described (e.g. TNFα blockers) are also able to prevent this bone loss.
  • Agents that Prevent Inflammation and/or Bone Loss
  • The inventors have identified a new class of compounds which, for example, prevent inflammation and/or bone loss, and thus may be used in the treatment of diseases with an inflammatory or autoimmune component, including, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, psoriasis, and psoriatic arthritis; diseases which involve bone loss, including, for example, bone loss associated with rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, Paget's disease of bone, and multiple myeloma; as well as cancer associated with activation of NFκB, with aberrant NFκB signaling, or with inflammation, including haematological malignancies such as multiple myeloma, leukaemia, T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, and other lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma), and solid tumours such as cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, and melanoma; and cancer associated with the inactivation or impairment of caspase-mediated cell death, such as gastric cancer, breast cancer, renal cancer, cervical cancer, and basal cell ameloblastomas.
  • Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, the inventors believe that this action may be via a mechanism that involves blocking TNFα and/or IL-1 and/or RANKL-signalling.
    • Biphenyl Sulfonamides
  • Greig et al., 2004 and Greig et al., 2006 describe a class of biphenyl alkyl sulfonamides as anti-resorptive agents for the treatment of bone diseases, including, for example, 2′,4′-difluoro-biphenyl-4-sulfonic acid (5-hydroxy-pentyl)-amide (ABD248) and 2′,4′-difluoro-biphenyl-4-sulfonic acid (4-hydroxy-butyl)-amide (ABD256) (shown below).
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00002
  • Greig et al., 2008 (not yet published), describes a class of biphenyl alkyl sulfonamides, as anti-resorptive agents for the treatment of bone diseases including, for example, 2′,4′-difluoro-biphenyl-4-sulfonic acid (3-hydroxymethyl-phenyl)amide (ABD456), 2′,4′-difluoro-biphenyl-4-sulfonic acid (4-hydroxymethyl-phenyl)amide (ABD466), and 2′,4′-difluoro-biphenyl-4-sulfonic acid [3-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-phenyl]-amide (ABD628), shown below.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00003
  • It appears that compounds of the following formulae may be known:
  • No. Structure Registry No.
    1
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00004
         		297742-90-6
    2
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00005
         		496015-30-6
    3
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00006
         		496015-31-7
    4
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00007
         		855253-65-5
    5
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00008
         		857624-18-1
    6
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00009
         		301354-93-8
    7
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00010
         		667901-42-0
    8
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00011
         		1022412-74-3
    9
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00012
         		326499-72-3
    10
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00013
         		326500-04-3
    11
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00014
         		326500-05-4
    12
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00015
         		326499-76-7
    13
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00016
         		326499-74-5
    14
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00017
         		326499-73-4
    15
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00018
         		220441-06-5
    16
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00019
         		220441-14-5
    17
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00020
         		220441-05-4
    18
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00021
         		866043-75-6 866043-74-5
    19
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00022
         		866043-71-2 866043-66-5 866043-65-4
    20
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00023
         		848632-03-1 848494-84-8
  • The present inventors have identified a new a class of aryl sulfonamides, as defined herein, that have surprising and unexpected properties.
  • The present inventors have identified a new a class of aryl sulfonamides, as defined herein, that have, inter alia, one or more surprising and unexpected properties.
  • Without wishing to be bound to any particular theory, the inventors believe that the new compounds have been protected against the major route of metabolism acting upon the previous biphenyl aryl sulfonamides (specifically, oxidation of the terminal alcohol to give a carboxylic acid) by the replacement of the aryl ring with a carbocyclic group; this may also be further combined with replacement of the alcohol by an amine. In addition to the resulting substantial improvement in metabolic stability, these replacement groups have also been selected to provide a further substantial enhancement in the aqueous solubility of the compounds. If a drug is to show oral activity, it must first be solvated, to permit absorption from the gastrointestinal tract. Second, the drug must be sufficiently resistant to first-pass metabolism by metabolic enzymes contained within the liver so as to be able to enter the circulation and permit sufficient quantities to reach the biological target. Third, the drug must be sufficiently potent against the biological target to give the desired therapeutic effect.
  • The optimization of pharmacokinetic properties (action of the body on the drug) of a drug is a developmental barrier of equal challenge as compared to the optimization of pharmacodynamic properties (action of the drug on the body). By improving both solubility and stability, with little or no loss of potency against the biological target, the new compounds disclosed herein show substantial improvements in their properties as oral therapeutic agents, as compared to previous compounds identified above. The new compounds combine the characteristics required of orally active agents for the treatment of inflammatory diseases and/or for the treatment of bone loss.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to certain aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds (for convenience, collectively referred to herein as “APSAC compounds”), as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition) comprising an APSAC compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to method of preparing a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition) comprising the step of admixing an APSAC compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting an inflammatory response, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting an immune system component with an effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting cellular and/or molecular pathways leading to joint destruction, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting cells associated with an immune response with a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting osteoclast survival, formation, and/or activity, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting an osteoclast with an effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting bone resorption, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting cells in the bone microenvironment with a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to a method of treatment comprising administering to a subject in need of treatment a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to an APSAC compound as described herein for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body by therapy.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to use of an APSAC compound, as described herein, in the manufacture of a medicament for use in treatment.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of inflammation and/or joint destruction and/or bone loss.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of disorders mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of disorders associated with bone loss, such as bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activation in rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, cancer-associated bone disease, Paget's disease and the like.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma), e.g., a haematological malignancy, multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma) associated with activation of NFκB, with aberrant NFκB signalling, or with inflammation, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, or melanoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, and melanoma associated with activation of NFκB, with aberrant NFκB signalling, or with inflammation, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia, e.g., a haematological malignancy, T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is part of treatment by combination therapy, e.g., in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to a kit comprising (a) an APSAC compound, as described herein, preferably provided as a pharmaceutical composition and in a suitable container and/or with suitable packaging; and (b) instructions for use, for example, written instructions on how to administer the compound.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to an APSAC compound obtainable by a method of synthesis as described herein, or a method comprising a method of synthesis as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to an APSAC compound obtained by a method of synthesis as described herein, or a method comprising a method of synthesis as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to novel intermediates, as described herein, which are suitable for use in the methods of synthesis described herein.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to the use of such novel intermediates, as described herein, in the methods of synthesis described herein.
  • As will be appreciated by one of skill in the art, features and preferred embodiments of one aspect of the invention will also pertain to other aspect of the invention.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (ng/mL) of the APSAC compound ABD773 (▪) after oral administration (1 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 2 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (ng/mL) of the APSAC compound ABD773 (▪) after intravenous administration (1 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 3 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (ng/mL) of the APSAC compound ABD781 (▪) after oral administration (1 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 4 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (ng/mL) of the APSAC compound ABD781 (▪) after intravenous administration (1 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 5 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (μg/mL) of the reference compound ABD455 (▪) after oral administration (2.5 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 6 is a graph showing mean plasma concentration (μg/mL) of the reference compound ABD455 (▪) after intravenous administration (2.5 mg/kg) to a rat model.
  • FIG. 7 is a series of images of human monocytes monitored using fluorescent light microscopy and showing the effects of ABD599 and ABD781 on caspase 3 activation in the presence of TNFα: (a) TNFα alone; (b) TNFα with 10 μM ABD599, and (c) TNFα with 10 μM ABD781.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Compounds
  • The compounds of the present invention are structurally related to 1-(aryl)-phenyl-4-sulfonic acid cyclohexyl amide:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00024
  • One aspect of the present invention pertains to compounds of the following formula, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof (collectively referred to herein as “aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl” or “APSAC” compounds”):
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00025
  • wherein:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00026
      • —Ar is independently phenyl, pyridinyl, or pyrimidinyl; and
      • p is independently an integer from 0 to 3;
        and wherein:
      • q is independently an integer from 0 to 3;
        and wherein:
      • —RSN is independently —H or saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
        and wherein:
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1 or -D2=O;
      • -D1- is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, cycloheptane-di-yl, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-di-yl, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-di-yl, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —RD;
      • -D2= is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, cycloheptane-yl-ylidene, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-yl-ylidene, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-yl-ylidene, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —RD;
      • each —RD is independently selected from —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RDD, —CF3, —OH, —ORDD, —NH2, —NHRDD, and —NRDD 2; and
      • each —RDD is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
        and wherein -Q1 is independently selected from:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00027
  • wherein:
      • each —R1N is independently —H, —RCN, or —RCF;
      • each —R2N is independently —H, —RCN, or —RCF;
      • each —RCN is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
      • each —RCF is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4fluoroalkyl;
      • or:
      • —NR1NR2N is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
      • —R1A is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R2A is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R1A and —R2A together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group;
      • —R1B is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R2B is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R1B and —R2B together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group;
      • or —R1B and —R2B together form ═O;
      • —R3A is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R4A is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R3A and —R4A together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group;
      • —R5A is independently —H, —RC, —RF, or —RJ; and
      • —R6A is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R5A and —R6A together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group;
      • —R3B is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R4B is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R3B and —R4B together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group;
      • —R5B is independently —H, —RC, —RF, —OH, or —ORO; and
      • —R6B is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R5B and —R6B together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group;
  • each —RC is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
      • each —RF is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4fluoroalkyl;
      • —RO is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
      • —RJ is independently —NH2, —NHRJN1, —NRJN1 2, or —NRJN2RJN3;
      • each —RJN1 is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl; and
      • —NRJN2RJN3 is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
        and wherein each —RX is independently:
      • —F, —Cl, —Br, —I,
      • —RXX,
      • —OH, —ORXX,
      • —SH, —SRXX,
      • —CF3, —OCF3, —SCF3,
      • —NH2, —NHRXX, —NRXX 2, —NRYYRZZ,
      • —C(═O)RXX, —OC(═O)RXX,
      • —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)ORXX,
      • —C(═O)NH2, —C(═O)NHRXX, —C(═O)NRXX 2, —C(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —OC(═O)NH2, —OC(═O)NHRXX, —OC(═O)NRXX 2, —OC(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —NHC(═O)RXX, —NRXXC(═O)RXX,
      • —NHC(═O)ORXX, —NRXXC(═O)ORXX,
      • —NHC(═O)NH2, —NHC(═O)NHRXX, —NHC(═O)NRXX 2, —NHC(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —NRXXC(═O)NH2, —NRXXC(═O)NHRXX, —NRXXC(═O)NRXX 2, —NRXXC(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —CN,
      • —NO2,
      • —S(═O)2NH2, —S(═O)2NHRXX, —S(═O)2NRXX 2, —S(═O)2NRYYRZZ,
      • —S(═O)RXX, —S(═O)2RXX, —OS(═O)2RXX, —S(═O)2OH, or —S(═O)2ORXX;
      • wherein:
      • each —RXX is independently saturated aliphatic C1-6alkyl, phenyl, or benzyl, wherein said phenyl and benzyl are optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from: —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CF3, —OCF3, —RXXX, —OH, —ORXXX, or —SRXXX, wherein each —RXXX is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl; and
      • each —NRYYRZZ is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
    The Group -A
  • In one embodiment, -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00028
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently phenyl, pyridinyl, or pyrimidinyl.
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently phenyl.
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently pyridinyl.
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently pyridin-2-yl.
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently pyridin-3-yl.
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently pyridin-4-yl.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00029
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently pyrimidinyl.
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently pyrimidin-2-yl.
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently pyrimidin-4-yl.
  • In one embodiment, —Ar is independently pyrimidin-5-yl.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00030
    • Substituents on —Ar
  • In one embodiment, p is independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • In one embodiment, p is independently an integer from 1 to 3.
  • In one embodiment, p is independently 0.
  • In one embodiment, p is independently 1.
  • In one embodiment, p is independently 2.
  • In one embodiment, p is independently 3.
    • The Group -A: Phenyl and Pyridinyl
  • In one embodiment, -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00031
  • wherein:
      • ═W— is —CH═ or —CRW═ and —Y═ is —CH═ or —CRY=; or
      • ═W— is —CH═ or —CRW═ and —Y═ is —N═; or
      • ═W— is —N═ and —Y═ is —CH═ or —CRY=;
      • —RW is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
      • —RY is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
      • —RX2 is independently —H or —RX2S;
      • —RX3 is independently —H or —RX3S;
      • —RX4 is independently —H or —RX4S;
      • —RX2S is independently —RX;
      • —RX3S is independently —RX; and
      • —RX4S is independently —RX.
  • In one embodiment, -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00032
  • In one embodiment, -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00033
  • In one embodiment, -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00034
    • The Group -A: Phenyl and Pyridinyl: the Groups ═W— and —Y═
  • In one embodiment, ═W— is —CH═ or —CRW═ and —Y═ is —CH═ or —CRY=.
  • In one embodiment, ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —CH═, as in, for example:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00035
  • In one embodiment, ═W— is —CH═ or —CRW═ and —Y═ is —N═.
  • In one embodiment, ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —N═, as in, for example:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00036
  • In one embodiment, ═W— is —N═ and —Y═ is —CH═ or —CRY=.
  • In one embodiment, ═W— is —N═ and —Y═ is —CH═, as in, for example:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00037
  • In one embodiment, —RW, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —RW, if present, is independently -Me.
  • In one embodiment, —RY, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —RY, if present, is independently -Me.
    • The Group -A: Phenyl: RX2 and RX4
  • In one embodiment, -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00038
  • wherein:
      • —RX2 is independently —H or —RX2S;
      • —RX4 is independently —H or —RX4S;
      • —RX2S is independently —RX; and
      • —RX4S is independently —RX.
    The Group —RX2
  • In one embodiment, —RX2, if present, is independently —H or —RX2S.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2, if present, is independently —RX2S.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2, if present, is independently —H.
    • The Group —RX3
  • In one embodiment, —RX3, if present, is independently —H or —RX3S.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3, if present, is independently —RX3S.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3, if present, is independently —H.
    • The Group —RX4
  • In one embodiment, —RX4, if present, is independently —H or —RX4S.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4, if present, is independently —RX4S.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4, if present, is independently —H.
    • Leading Phenylene Group
  • For the avoidance of doubt, the leading phenylene group is the phenylene group that links the group -A, on the left, with the group —S(═O)2N(RSN)(DQ), on the right.
  • And so, in one embodiment, the leading phenylene group is:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00039
  • In one embodiment, q is independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • In one embodiment, q is independently an integer from 1 to 3.
  • In one embodiment, q is independently 0.
  • In one embodiment, q is independently 1.
  • In one embodiment, q is independently 2.
  • In one embodiment, the leading phenylene group is:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00040
  • wherein:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H or —RX; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H or —RX.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H or —RX; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H;
        or:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H or —RX;
        or:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H or —RX.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H or —RX; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H.
    The Group —RX
  • In one embodiment, each —RX, if present, is independently:
      • —F, —Cl, —Br, —I,
      • —RXX,
      • —OH, —ORXX,
      • —SH, —SRXX,
      • —CF3, —OCF3, —SCF3,
      • —NH2, —NHRXX, —NRXX 2, —NRYYRZZ,
      • —C(═O)RXX, —OC(═O)RXX,
      • —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)ORXX,
      • —C(═O)NH2, —C(═O)NHRXX, —C(═O)NRXX 2, —C(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —OC(═O)NH2, —OC(═O)NHRXX, —OC(═O)NRXX 2, —OC(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —NHC(═O)RXX, —NRXX(═O)RXX,
      • —NHC(═O)ORXX, —NRXXC(═O)ORXX,
      • —NHC(═O)NH2, —NHC(═O)NHRXX, —NHC(═O)NRXX 2, —NHC(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —NRXX(═O)NH2, —NRXXC(═O)NHRXX, —NRXXC(═O)NRXX 2, —NRXX(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —CN,
      • —NO2,
      • —S(═O)2NH2, —S(═O)2NHRXX, —S(═O)2NRXX 2, —S(═O)2NRYYRZZ,
      • —S(═O)RXX, —S(═O)2RXX, —OS(═O)2RXX, —S(═O)2OH, or —S(═O)2ORXX;
      • wherein:
      • each —RXX is independently saturated aliphatic C1-6alkyl, phenyl, or benzyl, wherein said phenyl and benzyl are optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from: —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CF3, —OCF3, —RXXX, —OH, —ORXXX, or —SRXXX, wherein each —RXXX is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl; and
      • each —NRRZZ is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, each —RX, if present, is independently:
      • —F, —Cl, —Br, —I,
      • —RXX,
      • —OH, —ORXX,
      • —SH, —SRXX,
      • —CF3, —OCF3, —SCF3,
      • —NH2, —NHRXX, —NRXX 2, —NRYYRZZ,
      • —C(═O)RXX, —OC(═O)RXX,
      • —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)ORXX,
      • —C(═O)NH2, —C(═O)NHRXX, —C(═O)NRXX 2, —C(═O)NRYYRZZ,
      • —CN,
      • —NO2,
      • —S(═O)2NH2, —S(═O)2NHRXX, —S(═O)2NRXX 2, or —S(═O)2NRYYRZZ.
  • In one embodiment, each —RX, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXX, —OH, —ORXX, —SRXX, —CF3, —OCF3, —SCF3, —C(═O)RXX, —CN, or —NO2.
  • In one embodiment, each —RX, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXX, —OH, —ORXX, —SRXX, —CF3, —OCF3, —SCF3, —CN, or —NO2.
  • In one embodiment, each —RX, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXX, —OH, —ORXX, —SRXX, —CF3, —OCF3, —CN, or —NO2.
  • In one embodiment, each —RX, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXX, —ORXX, —SRXX, —CF3, or —OCF3.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXX, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-6alkyl, phenyl, or benzyl.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXX, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-6alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXX, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —NRYYRZZ, if present, is independently pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —NRYYRZZ, if present, is independently pyrrolidino, piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
    • Substituents on the Leading Phenylene Group
  • In one embodiment, the leading phenylene group is:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00041
  • wherein:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H or —RXCC; and
      • —RXc2 is independently —H or —RXCC;
        wherein each —RXCC is independently:
      • —F, —Cl, —RXCCC, —ORXCCC, CF3, OCF3;
        wherein each —RXCCC is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H or —RXCC; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H;
        or:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H or —RXCC;
        or:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H or —RXCC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H or —RXCC; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —RXC1 is independently —H; and
      • —RXC2 is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXCC, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, or —RXCCC.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXCC, if present, is independently —RXCCC.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXCCC, if present, is independently -Me, -Et, -nPr, or -iPr.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXCCC, if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
    • The Group —RX2S
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S, if present, is independently —RX.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXA, —ORXA, —SRXA, —CF3, or —OCF3, wherein each —RXA is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXA, —ORXA, —CF3, or —OCF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CF3, or —OCF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, or —CF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S, if present, is independently —F or —Cl.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S, if present, is independently —F.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S, if present, is independently —Cl.
    • The Group —RX3S
  • In one embodiment, —RX3S, if present, is independently —RX.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXA, —ORXA, —SRXA, —CF3, or —OCF3, wherein each —RXA is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXA, —ORXA, —CF3, or —OCF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CF3, or —OCF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, or —CF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3S, if present, is independently —F or —Cl.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3S, if present, is independently —F.
  • In one embodiment, —RX3S, if present, is independently —Cl.
    • The Group —RX4S
  • In one embodiment, —RX4S, if present, is independently —RX.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXA, —ORXA, —SRXA, —CF3, or —OCF3, wherein each —RXA is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXA, —ORXA, —CF3, or —OCF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CF3, or —OCF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4S, if present, is independently —F, —Cl, or —CF3.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4S, if present, is independently —F or —Cl.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4S, if present, is independently —F.
  • In one embodiment, —RX4S, if present, is independently —Cl.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S and —RX4S, if present, are each independently —F.
  • In one embodiment, —RX2S and —RX4S, if present, are each independently —Cl.
    • The Group —RXA
  • In one embodiment, each —RXA, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXA, if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • In one embodiment, each —RXA, if present, is independently -Me.
    • The Group -DQ
  • In embodiment, -DQ is independently -D1-Q1 or -D2=0.
  • In embodiment, -DQ is independently -D1-Q1.
  • In embodiment, -DQ is independently -D2=0.
    • The Group -D1-
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, cycloheptane-di-yl, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-di-yl, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-di-yl, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —RD.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, or cycloheptane-di-yl, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —RD.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, cycloheptane-di-yl, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-di-yl, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-di-yl, cyclohexane-di-yl, or cycloheptane-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-1,2-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-1,3-di-yl.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00042
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclohexane-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclohexane-1,2-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclohexane-1,3-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00043
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cycloheptane-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cycloheptane-1,2-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cycloheptane-1,3-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cycloheptane-1,4-di-yl.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00044
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-1,2-di-yl, cyclopentane-1,3-di-yl, cyclohexane-1,3-di-yl, cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl, or cycloheptane-1,4-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently cyclopentane-1,2-di-yl, cyclopentane-1,3-di-yl, or cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-3,8-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-8,3-di-yl.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00045
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-3,6-di-yl.
  • In one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-6,3-di-yl.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00046
  • For the avoidance of doubt, where no conformation is indicated, all possible conformations are encompassed.
  • For example, the group described as:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00047
  • encompasses (at least) the following well known conformations:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00048
  • Similarly, the group described as:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00049
  • encompasses (at least) the following well known conformations:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00050
  • Similarly, the group described as:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00051
  • encompasses (at least) the following well known conformations:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00052
  • Similarly, the group described as:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00053
  • encompasses (at least) the following well known conformations:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00054
  • For example, the group described as:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00055
  • encompasses (at least) the following well known conformations:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00056
    • The Group -D2=
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, cycloheptane-yl-ylidene, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-yl-ylidene, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-yl-ylidene, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —RD.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, cycloheptane-yl-ylidene, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-yl-ylidene, or bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-yl-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, or cycloheptane-yl-ylidene, and is optionally substituted with one or more groups —RD.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene, cyclohexane-yl-ylidene, or cycloheptane-yl-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene or cyclohexane-yl-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclopentane-yl-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclopentane-1-yl-2-ylidine.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclopentane-1-yl-3-ylidine.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00057
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclohexane-yl-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclohexane-1-yl-2-ylidine.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclohexane-1-yl-3-ylidine.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclohexane-1-yl-4-ylidine.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00058
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cycloheptane-yl-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cycloheptane-1-yl-2-ylidine.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cycloheptane-1-yl-3-ylidine.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cycloheptane-1-yl-4-ylidine.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00059
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently cyclohexane-1-yl-4-ylidine, and -D2=O is:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00060
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-yl-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-3-yl-8-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.2.1]octane-8-yl-3-ylidene.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00061
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-yl-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-3-yl-6-ylidene.
  • In one embodiment, -D2=, if present, is independently bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-6-yl-3-ylidene.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00062
  • Again, for the avoidance of doubt, where no conformation is indicated, all possible conformations are encompassed.
    • The Groups —RD
  • In one embodiment, each —RD, if present, is independently selected from —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RDD, —CF3, —OH, —ORDD, —NH2, —NHRDD, and —NRDD 2, wherein each —RDD is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, each —RDD, if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • In one embodiment, each —RDD, if present, is independently -Me.
  • For example, in one embodiment, -D1-, if present, is independently 4-methyl-cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00063
    • The Group -Q1
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently selected from:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00064
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently selected from:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00065
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00066
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00067
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently selected from:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00068
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently selected from:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00069
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00070
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00071
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00072
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently selected from:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00073
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently selected from:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00074
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00075
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00076
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00077
  • For the avoidance of doubt, where no stereochemistry is indicated, all possible conformations are encompassed.
  • For example, the group described as —CH(Me)OH or as any of the following:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00078
  • encompasses both stereoisomers:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00079
    • The Groups —R1N and —R2N
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —H, —RCN, or —RCF;
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H, —RCN, or —RCF;
      • each —RCN, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl; and
      • each —RCF, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4fluoroalkyl;
      • or:
      • —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —H or —RCN;
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H or —RCN; and
      • each —RCN, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
      • or:
      • —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —H, —RCN, or —RCF; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H, —RCN, or —RCF.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —H or —RCN; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H or —RCN.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —H, —RCN, or —RCF; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —H or —RCN; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —RCN or —RCF; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —RCN; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —RCF; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —RCN; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —RCN.
  • In one embodiment:
      • each —R1N, if present, is independently —H; and
      • each —R2N, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently pyrrolidino, piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently pyrrolidino or morpholino.
  • In one embodiment —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently morpholino.
  • In one embodiment, each —RCN, if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • In one embodiment, each —RCN, if present, is independently -Me.
  • In one embodiment, each —RCF, if present, is independently —CF3, —CH2CF3, or —CH2CH2F.
  • In one embodiment, each —RCF, if present, is independently —CF3.
  • In one embodiment, —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2, —NMeEt, —NH(iPr), —NH(CH2CF3), pyrrolidino, or morpholino.
  • In one embodiment, —NR1NR2N, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, or morpholino.
    • The Groups —R1A and —R2A
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R2A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R1A and —R2A, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R2A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1A, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R2A, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1A, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R2A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1A, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R2A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1A, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R2A, if present, is independently —RC;
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1A, if present, is independently —H; and
      • —R2A, if present, is independently —H;
  • In one embodiment, —R1A and —R2A, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment, —R1A and —R2A, if present, together form —CH2CH2—, —CH2CH2CH2—, or —CH2CH2CH2CH2—.
  • In one embodiment, —R1A and —R2A, if present, together form —CH2CH2—.
    • The Groups —R1B and —R2B
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1B is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R2B is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R1B and —R2B together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group;
      • or —R1B and —R2B together form ═O.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R2B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R1B and —R2B, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R2B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1B, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R2B, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1B, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R2B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1B, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R2B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1B, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R2B, if present, is independently —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R1B, if present, is independently —H; and
      • —R2B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment, —R1B and —R2B, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment, —R1B and —R2B, if present, together form —CH2CH2—, —CH2CH2CH2—, or —CH2CH2CH2CH2—.
  • In one embodiment, —R1B and —R2B, if present, together form —CH2CH2—.
  • In one embodiment, —R1B and —R2B, if present, together form ═O.
    • The Groups —R3A and —R4A
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R4A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R3A and —R4A, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R4A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3A, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R4A, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3A, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R4A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3A, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R4A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3A, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R4A, if present, is independently —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3A, if present, is independently —H; and
      • —R4A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment, —R3A and —R4A, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment, —R3A and —R4A, if present, together form —CH2CH2—, —CH2CH2CH2—, or —CH2CH2CH2CH2—.
  • In one embodiment, —R3A and —R4A, if present, together form —CH2CH2—.
    • The Groups —R5A and —R6A
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, —RF, or —RJ; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R5A and —R6A, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RJ; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —RJ; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —RJ; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —RJ; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5A, if present, is independently —H; and
      • —R6A, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment, —R5A and —R6A, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment, —R5A and —R6A, if present, together form —CH2CH2—, —CH2CH2CH2—, or —CH2CH2CH2CH2—.
  • In one embodiment, —R5A and —R6A, if present, together form —CH2CH2—.
    • The Groups —R3B and —R4B
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R4B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R3B and —R4B, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF; and
      • —R4B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3B, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R4B, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3B, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R4B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3B, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R4B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3B, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R4B, if present, is independently —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R3B, if present, is independently —H; and
  • —R4B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment, —R3B and —R4B, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment, —R3B and —R4B, if present, together form —CH2CH2—, —CH2CH2CH2—, or —CH2CH2CH2CH2—.
  • In one embodiment, —R3B and —R4B, if present, together form —CH2CH2—.
    • The Groups —R5B and —R6B
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, —RF, —OH, or —ORO; and
      • —R5C, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF;
      • or —R5B and —R6B, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, —RF, —OH, or —ORO; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, or —RF.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —H, —RC, —OH, or —ORO; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —OH or —ORO; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —OH or —ORO; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —OH; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —H or —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —H or —RC; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —H; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —RC; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —RC.
  • In one embodiment:
      • —R5B, if present, is independently —H; and
      • —R6B, if present, is independently —H.
  • In one embodiment, —R5B and —R6B, if present, together form a saturated aliphatic C2-4alkylene group.
  • In one embodiment, —R5B and —R6B, if present, together form —CH2CH2—, —CH2CH2CH2—, or —CH2CH2CH2CH2—.
  • In one embodiment, —R5B and —R6B, if present, together form —CH2CH2—.
    • The Group —RO
  • In one embodiment, —RO, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —RO, if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • In one embodiment, —RO, if present, is independently -Me.
    • The Group —RO
  • In one embodiment, each —RC, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, each —RC, if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • In one embodiment, each —RC, if present, is independently -Me.
    • The Group —RF
  • In one embodiment, each —RF, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4fluoroalkyl.
  • In one embodiment, each —RF, if present, is independently —CF3, —CH2CF3, or —CH2CH2F.
  • In one embodiment, each —RF, if present, is independently —CF3.
  • The Group —RJ
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHJN1, —NRJN1 2, or —NRJN2RJN3.
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHJN1, or —NRJN1 2.
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2.
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NHRJN1.
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NRJN1 2.
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NRJN2RJN3.
  • In one embodiment, each —RJN1, if present, is independently saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, each —RJN1, if present, is independently -Me, -Et, or -iPr.
  • In one embodiment, each —RJN1, if present, is independently -Me or -Et.
  • In one embodiment, each —RJN1, if present, is independently -Me.
  • In one embodiment, —NRJN2RJN3, if present, is independently azetidino, pyrrolidino, imidazolidino, pyrazolidino, piperidino, piperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, azepino, or diazepino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —NRJN2RJN3, if present, is independently piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino, each optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —NRJN2RJN3, if present, is independently morpholino.
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2, —NH(nPr), —N(nPr)2, —NH(iPr), —N(iPr)2, piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino.
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, or morpholino.
  • In one embodiment, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, or —NMe2.
    • The Group -Q1: Some Preferred Embodiments
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —OH, —CH2OH, —CH(Me)OH, —C(Me)2OH, —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2, —NMeEt, —NH(iPr), pyrrolidino, morpholino, —NHCH2CF3, —CH2NH2, —CH2NHMe, —CH2NMe2, —CH2NHEt, —CH2NEt2, —CH(NHMe)CH2OH, —C(═O)NH2, —C(═O)NHMe, —C(═O)NMe2, —C(═O)NHEt, or —C(═O)NEt2.
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —OH, —CH2OH, —CH(Me)OH, —C(Me)2OH, —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2, or —CH(NHMe)CH2OH.
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —OH, —CH2OH, —CH(Me)OH, or —C(Me)2OH.
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —OH.
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —CH2OH, —CH(Me)OH, or —C(Me)2OH.
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —CH2OH.
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2, —NMeEt, —NH(iPr), pyrrolidino, morpholino, —NHCH2CF3, —CH2NH2, —CH2NHMe, —CH2NMe2, —CH2NHEt, —CH2NEt2, —CH(NHMe)CH2OH, —C(═O)NH2, —C(═O)NHMe, —C(═O)NMe2, —C(═O)NHEt, or —C(═O)NEt2.
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2, —NMeEt, —NH(iPr), pyrrolidino, morpholino, —NHCH2CF3, —CH2NH2, —CH2NHMe, —CH2NMe2, —CH2NHEt, —CH2NEt2, or —CH(NHMe)CH2OH.
  • In one embodiment, -Q1, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, or —NEt2.
    • The Group —RSB
  • In one embodiment, —RSN is independently —H or saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl.
  • In one embodiment, —RSN is independently —H, —Me, or -Et.
  • In one embodiment, —RSN is independently —H.
    • Some Preferred Combinations
  • In one preferred embodiment:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00080
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1;
      • -D1- is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl.
  • In one preferred embodiment:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00081
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1;
      • -D1- is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl; and
      • -Q1 is independently —OH, —CH2OH, —CH(Me)OH, —C(Me)2OH, —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2, or —CH(NHMe)CH2OH.
  • In one preferred embodiment:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00082
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1;
      • -D1- is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl; and
      • -Q1 is independently —OH.
  • In one preferred embodiment:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00083
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1;
      • -D1- is independently cyclohexane-di-yl; and
      • -Q1 is independently —OH.
  • In one preferred embodiment:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00084
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1;
      • -D1- is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl; and
      • -Q1 is independently —CH2OH, —CH(Me)OH, or —C(Me)2OH.
  • In one preferred embodiment:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00085
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1;
      • -D1- is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl; and
      • -Q1 is independently —CH2OH.
  • In one preferred embodiment:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00086
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1;
      • -D1- is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl; and
      • -Q1 is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2.
  • In one preferred embodiment:
      • -A is independently:
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00087
      • -DQ is independently -D1-Q1;
      • -D1- is independently cyclopentane-di-yl or cyclohexane-di-yl; and
      • -Q1 is independently —CH(NHMe)CH2OH.
  • In other preferred embodiments, additionally:
      • —RX2 is independently —F or —Cl; and
      • —RX4 is independently —F or —Cl.
  • In other preferred embodiments, additionally:
      • —RX2 is independently —F or —CI;
      • —RX4 is independently —F or —CI; and
      • —RSN is independently —H or -Me.
  • In other preferred embodiments, additionally:
      • —RX2 is independently —F;
      • —RX4 is independently —F; and
      • —RSN is independently —H.
  • In other preferred embodiments, additionally, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, —NHEt, —NEt2, —NH(nPr), —N(nPr)2, —NH(iPr), —N(iPr)2, piperidino, piperazino, or morpholino.
  • In other preferred embodiments, additionally, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, —NMe2, or morpholino.
  • In other preferred embodiments, additionally, —RJ, if present, is independently —NH2, —NHMe, or —NMe2.
    • Molecular Weight
  • In one embodiment, the APSAC compound has a molecular weight of from 317 to 1200.
  • In one embodiment, the bottom of range is 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 500.
  • In one embodiment, the top of range is 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700, or 600.
  • In one embodiment, the range is from 350 to 700.
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD682
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00088
    ABD683
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00089
    ABD684
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00090
    ABD698
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00091
    ABD699
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00092
    ABD702
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00093
    ABD703
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00094
    ABD704
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00095
    ABD705
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00096
    ABD706
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00097
    • Combinations
  • It is appreciated that certain features of the invention, which are, for clarity, described in the context of separate embodiments, may also be provided in combination in a single embodiment. Conversely, various features of the invention, which are, for brevity, described in the context of a single embodiment, may also be provided separately or in any suitable sub-combination. All combinations of the embodiments pertaining to the chemical groups represented by the variables (e.g., -A, —Ar, p, —RX, q, —RSN, -DQ, -D1-, -Q1, -D2=, —RD, —RDD, —R1A, —R2A, —R3A, —R4A, —R5A, —R6A, —R1B, —R2B, —R3B, —R4B, —R5B, —R6B, —R1N, —R2N, —RCN, —RCF, —NR1NR2N, —RC, —RF, —RJ, —RO, —RJN1, —NRJN2RJN3, —RXX, —NRYYRZZ, —RXXX, ═W—, —Y═, —RW, —RY, —RX2, —RX3, —RX4, —RX2S, —RX3S, —RX4S, —RXA, etc.) are specifically embraced by the present invention and are disclosed herein just as if each and every combination was individually and explicitly disclosed, to the extent that such combinations embrace compounds that are stable compounds (i.e., compounds that can be isolated, characterised, and tested for biological activity). In addition, all sub-combinations of the chemical groups listed in the embodiments describing such variables are also specifically embraced by the present invention and are disclosed herein just as if each and every such sub-combination of chemical groups was individually and explicitly disclosed herein.
    • Specific Embodiments
  • In one embodiment, the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD599
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00098
    ABD655
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00099
    ABD665
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00100
    ABD679
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00101
    ABD710
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00102
    ABD712
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00103
    ABD714
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00104
    ABD716
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00105
    ABD730
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00106
    ABD732
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00107
    ABD735
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00108
    ABD742
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00109
    ABD756
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00110
    ABD777
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00111
    ABD827
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00112
    ABD828
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00113
    ABD836
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00114
    ABD837
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00115
    ABD839
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00116
    ABD845
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00117
    ABD861
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00118
  • In one embodiment, the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD769
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00119
    ABD770
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00120
    ABD771
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00121
    ABD772
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00122
    ABD773
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00123
    ABD774
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00124
    ABD775
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00125
    ABD776
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00126
    ABD781
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00127
    ABD794
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00128
    ABD795
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00129
    ABD796
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00130
    ABD797
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00131
    ABD813
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00132
    ABD814
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00133
    ABD815
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00134
    ABD840
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00135
    ABD841
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00136
    ABD846
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00137
    ABD863
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00138
  • In one embodiment, the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No Structure
    ABD787
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00139
    ABD798
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00140
    ABD799
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00141
    ABD812
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00142
    ABD816
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00143
    ABD817
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00144
    ABD818
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00145
    ABD819
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00146
    ABD820
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00147
    ABD821
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00148
    ABD822
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00149
    ABD864
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00150
    ABD865
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00151
  • In one embodiment, the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD823
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00152
    ABD824
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00153
    ABD825
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00154
    ABD826
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00155
  • In one embodiment, the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD800
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00156
    ABD842
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00157
    ABD843
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00158
    ABD844
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00159
  • In one embodiment, the compounds are selected from a compound of the following formula and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD786
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00160
  • In one embodiment, the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD824a
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00161
    ABD826a
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00162
    ABD847
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00163
    ABD848
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00164
    ABD849
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00165
    ABD868
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00166
  • In one embodiment, the compounds are selected from compounds of the following formulae and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD899
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00167
    ABD900
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00168
    ABD901
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00169
    ABD903
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00170
  • In one embodiment, the compounds is selected from a compound of the following formula and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof:
  • Compound No. Structure
    ABD902
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00171
    • Chirality
  • In some embodiments (for example, according to the choice for -D1-; the choices for —R1A and —R2A; the choices for —R3A and —R4A; the choices for —R5A and —R6A; the choices for —R1B and —R2B; the choices for —R3B and —R4B; the choices for —R5B and —R6B), the compound may have one or more chiral centres.
  • The chiral centre, or each chiral centre, if more than one is present, is independently in the R-configuration or the S-configuration.
  • If no configuration is indicated, then both configurations are encompassed.
    • Substantially Purified Forms
  • One aspect of the present invention pertains to APSAC compounds, as described herein, in substantially purified form and/or in a form substantially free from contaminants.
  • In one embodiment, the substantially purified form is at least 50% by weight, e.g., at least 60% by weight, e.g., at least 70% by weight, e.g., at least 80% by weight, e.g., at least 90% by weight, e.g., at least 95% by weight, e.g., at least 97% by weight, e.g., at least 98% by weight, e.g., at least 99% by weight.
  • Unless specified, the substantially purified form refers to the compound in any stereoisomeric or enantiomeric form. For example, in one embodiment, the substantially purified form refers to a mixture of stereoisomers, i.e., purified with respect to other compounds. In one embodiment, the substantially purified form refers to one stereoisomer, e.g., optically pure stereoisomer. In one embodiment, the substantially purified form refers to a mixture of enantiomers. In one embodiment, the substantially purified form refers to an equimolar mixture of enantiomers (i.e., a racemic mixture, a racemate). In one embodiment, the substantially purified form refers to one enantiomer, e.g., optically pure enantiomer.
  • In one embodiment, the contaminants represent no more than 50% by weight, e.g., no more than 40% by weight, e.g., no more than 30% by weight, e.g., no more than 20% by weight, e.g., no more than 10% by weight, e.g., no more than 5% by weight, e.g., no more than 3% by weight, e.g., no more than 2% by weight, e.g., no more than 1% by weight.
  • Unless specified, the contaminants refer to other compounds, that is, other than stereoisomers or enantiomers. In one embodiment, the contaminants refer to other compounds and other stereoisomers. In one embodiment, the contaminants refer to other compounds and the other enantiomer.
  • In one embodiment, the substantially purified form is at least 60% optically pure (i.e., 60% of the compound, on a molar basis, is the desired stereoisomer or enantiomer, and 40% is the undesired stereoisomer or enantiomer), e.g., at least 70% optically pure, e.g., at least 80% optically pure, e.g., at least 90% optically pure, e.g., at least 95% optically pure, e.g., at least 97% optically pure, e.g., at least 98% optically pure, e.g., at least 99% optically pure.
    • Isomers
  • Certain compounds may exist in one or more particular geometric, optical, enantiomeric, diasteriomeric, epimeric, atropic, stereoisomeric, tautomeric, conformational, or anomeric forms, including but not limited to, cis- and trans-forms; E- and Z-forms; c-, t-, and r-forms; endo- and exo-forms; R—, S—, and meso-forms; D- and L-forms; d- and l-forms; (+) and (−) forms; keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms; syn- and anti-forms; synclinal- and anticlinal-forms; α- and β-forms; axial and equatorial forms; boat-, chair-, twist-, envelope-, and halfchair-forms; and combinations thereof, hereinafter collectively referred to as “isomers” (or “isomeric forms”).
  • Note that, except as discussed below for tautomeric forms, specifically excluded from the term “isomers,” as used herein, are structural (or constitutional) isomers (i.e., isomers which differ in the connections between atoms rather than merely by the position of atoms in space). For example, a reference to a methoxy group, —OCH3, is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, a hydroxymethyl group, —CH2OH. Similarly, a reference to ortho-chlorophenyl is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, meta-chlorophenyl. However, a reference to a class of structures may well include structurally isomeric forms falling within that class (e.g., C1-7alkyl includes n-propyl and iso-propyl; butyl includes n-, iso-, sec-, and tert-butyl; methoxyphenyl includes ortho-, meta-, and para-methoxyphenyl).
  • The above exclusion does not pertain to tautomeric forms, for example, keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms, as in, for example, the following tautomeric pairs: keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/amidine, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, N-nitroso/hydroxyazo, and nitro/aci-nitro.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00172
  • Note that specifically included in the term “isomer” are compounds with one or more isotopic substitutions. For example, H may be in any isotopic form, including 1H, 2H (D), and 3H (T); C may be in any isotopic form, including 12C, 13C, and 14C; O may be in any isotopic form, including 16O and 18O; and the like.
  • Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound includes all such isomeric forms, including mixtures (e.g., racemic mixtures) thereof. Methods for the preparation (e.g., asymmetric synthesis) and separation (e.g., fractional crystallisation and chromatographic means) of such isomeric forms are either known in the art or are readily obtained by adapting the methods taught herein, or known methods, in a known manner.
    • Salts
  • It may be convenient or desirable to prepare, purify, and/or handle a corresponding salt of the compound, for example, a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al., 1977, “Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts,” J. Pharm. Sci., Vol. 66, pp. 1-19.
  • For example, if the compound is anionic, or has a functional group which may be anionic (e.g., —COOH may be —COO−, then a salt may be formed with a suitable cation. Examples of suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na+ and K+, alkaline earth cations such as Ca2+ and Mg2+, and other cations such as Al+3. Examples of suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e., NH4 +) and substituted ammonium ions (e.g., NH3R+, NH2R2 +, NHR3 +, NR4 +). Examples of some suitable substituted ammonium ions are those derived from: ethylamine, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, triethylamine, butylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperizine, benzylamine, phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine. An example of a common quaternary ammonium ion is N(CH3)4 +.
  • If the compound is cationic, or has a functional group which may be cationic (e.g., —NH2 may be —NH3 +), then a salt may be formed with a suitable anion. Examples of suitable inorganic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following inorganic acids: hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, sulfuric, sulfurous, nitric, nitrous, phosphoric, and phosphorous.
  • Examples of suitable organic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following organic acids: 2-acetyoxybenzoic, acetic, ascorbic, aspartic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, cinnamic, citric, edetic, ethanedisulfonic, ethanesulfonic, fumaric, glucheptonic, gluconic, glutamic, glycolic, hydroxymaleic, hydroxynaphthalene carboxylic, isethionic, lactic, lactobionic, lauric, maleic, malic, methanesulfonic, mucic, oleic, oxalic, palmitic, pamoic, pantothenic, phenylacetic, phenylsulfonic, propionic, pyruvic, salicylic, stearic, succinic, sulfanilic, tartaric, toluenesulfonic, and valeric. Examples of suitable polymeric organic anions include, but are not limited to, those derived from the following polymeric acids: tannic acid, carboxymethyl cellulose.
  • Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound also includes salt forms thereof.
    • Solvates and Hydrates
  • It may be convenient or desirable to prepare, purify, and/or handle a corresponding solvate of the compound. The term “solvate” is used herein in the conventional sense to refer to a complex of solute (e.g., compound, salt of compound) and solvent. If the solvent is water, the solvate may be conveniently referred to as a hydrate, for example, a mono-hydrate, a di-hydrate, a tri-hydrate, etc.
  • Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound also includes solvate and hydrate forms thereof.
    • Chemical Synthesis
  • Methods for the chemical synthesis of APSAC compounds of the present invention are described herein. These and/or other well-known methods may be modified and/or adapted in known ways in order to facilitate the synthesis of additional APSAC compounds of the present invention.
  • In one approach, an appropriate biphenyl compound is prepared from a boronic acid and bromobenzene via a Suzuki coupling, for example, as described by O'Brien et al., 2000.
  • The biphenyl is sulfonylated using chlorosulfonic acid to give the corresponding sulfonic acid. The acid is then reacted with thionyl chloride to give the corresponding aryl sulfonyl chloride. Finally the sulfonyl chloride is coupled with an amine to give the corresponding sulfonamide. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00173
  • In another approach, the sulfonamide can be formed first, from a suitable bromobenzene sulfonyl chloride and amine, and the biphenyl compound then prepared by a similar Suzuki methodology. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00174
  • In another approach, the cyclohexanol can be replaced by a cyclohexane methyl alcohol, by coupling of the sulfonyl chloride with a carboxylic ester and subsequent reduction. For example the biphenyl sulfonyl chloride can be reacted with 4-amino-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid methyl ester in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of a suitable base, such as pyridine, and then reduced, for example, with lithium aluminium hydride in a solvent, such as THF, to give the desired alcohol. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00175
  • In another approach, the cyclohexane moiety can be replaced by other carbocycles to give a range of target compounds. For example, each of the four isomers of 3-amino-cyclopentane carboxylic acid and each of the four isomers of 3-amino-cyclopentane acetic acid are known and available and can be coupled with the required sulfonyl chloride and subsequently reduced, for example, with lithium aluminium hydride, to give the desired alcohol. Examples of such methods are shown in the following schemes.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00176
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00177
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00178
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00179
  • In another approach, the alcohol can be replaced by an amide by direct reaction of the sulfonyl chloride with the required aminocarboxylic acid, subsequent chlorination of the acid, and coupling with the required amine. For example, a biphenylsulfonyl chloride can be coupled with 4-aminocyclohexane carboxylic acid in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of a base, such as pyridine, the acid chlorinated by reflux in thionyl chloride, in a solvent such as DCM, and then coupled with methylamine in a solvent such as THF. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00180
  • In another approach, the amide is reduced to the corresponding amine by reaction with a suitable reducing agent. For example, the amide can be reduced by lithium aluminium hydride in a solvent such as THF. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00181
  • In another approach, the amino group can be introduced by direct reaction of a suitable amine with a sulfonyl chloride. For example a biphenyl sulfonyl chloride can be coupled with 1,4-diaminocyclohexane in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of a suitable base, such as pyridine. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00182
  • In another approach, amino substitutions may be made by nucleophilic attack of a suitable amine on a cyclohexanone. For example, the cyclohexanone can be prepared from the cyclohexanol derivative by use of Jones' oxidation (chromium trioxide/sulfuric acid), subsequent reaction with methylamine, and reduction in the presence of sodium cyanoborohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride in a solvent, such as methanol or THF. This methodology gives a mixture of products, which can be separated by HPLC. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00183
  • In another approach, where direct amination of the cyclohexanone gives multiple reactions, it is also possible to first react the ketone with 2,4-dimethoxybenzylamine, to give a protected intermediate. This intermediate then releases the desired amine on treatment with trifluoroacetic acid. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00184
  • In another approach, further substituents can be added to the amine. For example the amine can be reacted with an acid chloride or anhydride, to give an amide, which may then be further reduced to give the secondary amine. For example, the amine can be acylated with trifluoroacetic anhydride in the presence of triethylamine and then reduced with borane in a solvent such as THF. The mixture of products may then be separated by preparative HPLC to give the cis- and trans-isomers. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00185
  • In another approach, the cyclohexanone intermediate can be used to prepare cis- or trans-isomers where the required starting material is unavailable. For example, the cyclohexanone derivative can be prepared from trans-4-aminocyclohexanol and reduced with LS-Selectride (lithium trisiamylborohydride) in THF to give the cis-isomer as the final product. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00186
  • In another approach, the cyclohexanone intermediate can be reduced with a Grignard reagent to give the tertiary alcohol. For example, the cyclohexanone can be reacted with methyl magnesium bromide and the racemic mixture separated by preparative HPLC to give the cis- and trans-isomers. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00187
  • In another approach, the cis and trans-aminocyclohexanol isomers can be separated prior to coupling with the sulfonyl chloride. For example, trans-4-aminocyclohexanol can be amino-protected with a suitable protecting group, oxidised to the cyclohexanone, reacted with a suitable Grignard, and then separated, prior to deprotection and coupling. For example, the amine can be BOC protected, using di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, the alcohol oxidised using pyridinium chlorochromate, the cyclohexanone reacted with methylmagnesium chloride and the BOC protecting group removed with a reagent such as trifluoroacetic acid or ethanolic HCl, following separation of the isomers by column chromatography. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00188
  • In another approach, further substituents may be added to a cyclohexane or cyclopentane methylalcohol derivative, by nucleophilic attack on the corresponding carboxylic ester. For example the ester can be reacted with a Grignard reagent such as methyl magnesium bromide in a solvent such as THF. An example of such a method is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00189
  • In another approach, the biphenyl sulfonamide group can be replaced by a heteroaryl-phenyl sulfonamide motif by preparation of any of the above derivatives as a bromophenyl sulfonamide derivative, preparation of the boronic acid or boronate, and subsequent Suzuki coupling with a substituted pyridyl bromide, at a suitable stage of the reaction pathway. For example, bromobenzene sulfonamide compounds can be prepared from the cyclohexanol, cyclohexane carboxylic acid, and cyclopentane carboxylic acid compounds described in the above schemes. These can then be reacted with bis(pinacolato)diboron to give the required borane, which can then be coupled with an appropriate heterocyclic bromide using Suzuki coupling. Examples of such methods are shown in the following schemes.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00190
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00191
  • In another approach, all four 2-aminocyclopentane carboxylate isomers can be prepared by reductive amination of ethyl 2-oxocyclopentanecarboxylate and used to prepare the respective sulfonamide-cyclopentane methyl alcohol compound. For example, ethyl 2-oxocyclopentanecarboxylate can be reacted with ammonium acetate and then reduced with sodium triacetoxyborohydride to give the racemic mixture of 2-aminocarboxylates, which may be separated by HPLC, or further coupled with a biphenyl sulfonyl chloride, reduced with lithium aluminium hydride and then separated. An example is shown in the following scheme.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00192
    • Compositions
  • One aspect of the present invention pertains to a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition) comprising an APSAC compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient.
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to a method of preparing a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition) comprising admixing an APSAC compound, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient.
    • Uses
  • The APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be anti-inflammatory agents, which may act by blockade or modification of pro-inflammatory signalling pathways (for example those mediated by TNFα signalling and NFκB or AP-1 activation) and thus may prevent inflammation or suppress autoimmune responses or offer protection against joint destruction and other effects of chronic inflammatory disease.
  • The APSAC compounds described herein are also believed to be anti-resorptive agents, which may act by blockade or modification of pathways that lead to excessive osteoclast activity (for example those mediated by RANKL, TNFα, and IL-1 signalling and NFκB activation) and thereby protect against the bone loss seen in osteoporosis and many chronic inflammatory conditions.
  • Thus, the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of inflammation and/or joint destruction and/or bone loss.
  • Thus, the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of disorders mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system.
  • Thus, the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of, inflammatory and autoimmune disorders, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, and the like.
  • Thus, the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of disorders associated with bone loss, such as bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activation in rheumatoid arthritis; osteoporosis; cancer-associated bone disease; Paget's disease; and the like.
  • Thus, the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of haematological malignancies, e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma), e.g., haematological malignancies, multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma) associated with activation of NFκB, with aberrant NFκB signalling, or with inflammation.
  • Thus, the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of solid tumour cancers, e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, or melanoma, e.g., solid tumour cancers, cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, and melanoma associated with activation of NFκB, with aberrant NFκB signalling, or with inflammation.
  • Thus, the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia, e.g., a haematological malignancy, T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • Thus, the APSAC compounds described herein are believed to be useful in the treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer or basal cell ameloblastoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
    • Use in Methods of Inhibition
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting an inflammatory response, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting an immune system component with an effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting cellular and/or molecular pathways leading to joint destruction, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting cells associated with an immune response with a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting osteoclast survival, formation, and/or activity, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting an osteoclast with an effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a method of inhibiting bone resorption, in vitro or in vivo, comprising contacting cells in the bone microenvironment with a therapeutically-effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein.
  • The term “immune system component,” as used herein, relates to, but is not restricted to, cells such as macrophages, T-cells, B-cells, NK-cells, monocytes, neutrophils, dendritic cells, lymphocytes, leukocytes, granulocytes, antigen-presenting cells, and other cells of the haematopoietic lineage including osteoclasts.
  • The term “cells in the bone microenvironment,” as used herein, pertains to cells such as osteoblasts, osteoclasts, osteocytes, and bone marrow stromal cells, which are located in close proximity to bone (e.g., within one hundred micrometers of the bone surface).
    • Use in Methods of Therapy
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to an APSAC compound, as described herein, for use in a method of treatment of the human or animal body by therapy.
    • Use in the Manufacture of Medicaments
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to use of an APSAC compound, as described herein, in the manufacture of a medicament for use in treatment.
  • In one embodiment, the medicament comprises the APSAC compound.
    • Methods of Treatment
  • Another aspect of the present invention pertains to a method of treatment comprising administering to a patient in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of an APSAC compound, as described herein, preferably in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
    • Diseases and Disorders
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of an inflammatory disorder or an autoimmune disorder.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a disorder associated with inflammation and/or activation of the immune system.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a disorder mediated by excessive and/or inappropriate and/or prolonged activation of the immune system.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of inflammation.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a disorder associated with inflammation or activation of the immune system.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of psoriasis.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of psoriatic arthritis.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD).
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of atherosclerosis.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of ankylosing spondylitis.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of inflammatory bowel disease.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is prevention of an immune response leading to organ or graft rejection following transplant.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a tumour which over expresses TNFα, IL-1, RANKL, or NFκB, or in which inhibition of TNFα, IL-1, RANKL, or NFκB facilitates or improves the action of cytotoxic tumouricidal agents.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma), e.g., a haematological malignancy, multiple myeloma, leukaemia, or lymphoma (e.g., non-Hodgkin Lymphoma) associated with activation of NFκB, with aberrant NFκB signalling, or with inflammation, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, or melanoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, cancer of the bladder, breast cancer (female and/or male), colon cancer, kidney cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, thyroid cancer, and melanoma associated with activation of NFκB, with aberrant NFκB signalling, or with inflammation, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a haematological malignancy, e.g., T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia, e.g., a haematological malignancy, T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma, e.g., a solid tumour cancer, e.g., renal cell carcinoma, breast cancer (female and/or male), gastric cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, or basal cell ameloblastoma associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling, e.g., alone, or in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is part of treatment by combination therapy, e.g., in combination with, and to augment the efficacy of, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a disease or disorder selected from: diseases having an inflammatory or autoimmune component, including asthma, atherosclerosis, allergic diseases, such as atopy, allergic rhinitis, atopic dermatitis, anaphylaxis, allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, and hypersensitivity pneumonitis (pigeon breeders disease, farmer's lung disease, humidifier lung disease, malt workers' lung disease); allergies, including flea allergy dermatitis in mammals such as domestic animals, e.g., dogs and cats, contact allergens including mosquito bites or other insect sting allergies, poison ivy, poison oak, poison sumac, or other skin allergens; autoimmune disorders, including, but not limited to, type I diabetes and associated complications, multiple sclerosis, arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune (Hasimoto's) thyroiditis, autoimmune liver diseases such as hepatitis and primary biliary cirrhosis, hyperthyroidism (Graves' disease; thyrotoxicosis), insulin-resistant diabetes, autoimmune adrenal insufficiency (Addison's disease), autoimmune oophoritis, autoimmune orchitis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria, Behcet's disease, autoimmune thrombocytopenia, autoimmune neutropenia, pernicious anemia, pure red cell anemia, autoimmune coagulopathies, myasthenia gravis, experimental allergic encephalomyelitis, autoimmune polyneuritis, pemphigus and other bullous diseases, rheumatic carditis, Goodpasture's syndrome, postcardiotomy syndrome, Sjogren's syndrome, polymyositis, dermatomyositis, and scleroderma; disease states resulting from inappropriate inflammation, either local or systemic, for example, irritable or inflammatory bowel syndrome (Mazzucchelli et al., 1996, J. Pathol., Vol. 178, p. 201), skin diseases such as lichen planus, delayed type hypersensitivity, chronic pulmonary inflammation, e.g., pulmonary alveolitis and pulmonary granuloma, gingival inflammation or other periodontal disease, and osseous inflammation associated with lesions of endodontic origin (Volejnikova et al., 1997, Am. J. Pathol., Vol. 150, p. 1711), hypersensitivity lung diseases such as hypersensitivity pneumonitis (Sugiyama et al., 1995, Eur. Respir. J., Vol. 8, p. 1084), and inflammation related to histamine release from basophils (Dvorak et al., 1996, J. Allergy Clin. Immunol., Vol. 98, p. 355), such as hay fever, histamine release from mast cells (Galli et al., 1989, Ciba Foundation Symposium, Vol. 147, p. 53), or mast cell tumours, types of type 1 hypersensitivity reactions (anaphylaxis, skin allergy, hives, gout, allergic rhinitis, and allergic gastroenteritis); ulcerative colitis or Crohn's disease; TNFα induced polycystic kidney disease (Li et al., 2008, Nature Medicine, Vol. 14(8), p. 863); or Cryopyrin-Associated Periodic Syndromes, including Muckle-Wells Syndrome.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a disorder mediated by osteoclasts.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of a disorder characterised by excessive bone resorption.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of bone loss.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of bone loss associated with inflammation.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of bone loss not associated with inflammation.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of bone loss associated with excessive osteoclast activation.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of joint destruction.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of joint destruction associated with inflammation.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of joint destruction associated with excessive osteoclast activation.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of bone loss associated with rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, cancer-associated bone disease, or Paget's disease of bone.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of rheumatoid arthritis, osteoporosis, cancer-associated bone disease, or Paget's disease of bone.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of neoplasia of bones, whether as a primary tumour or as metastases, including but not limited to, osteosarcoma and osteoma (Zheng et al., 1998, J. Cell Biochem., Vol. 70, p. 121) and cancer-associated bone disease (e.g., hypercalcaemia of malignancy, bone metastases, osteolytic bone metastases, multiple myeloma, breast carcinoma).
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of hypercalcaemia caused by conditions associated with increased bone resorption, including, but not limited to: vitamin D intoxication, primary or tertiary hyperparathyroidism, immobilisation, and sarcoidosis.
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of aseptic loosening of prosthetic implants (e.g., artificial joints, e.g., knees, hips, etc., can loosen due to osteoclast activity driven by local inflammation) (see, e.g., Childs, L. M., et al., 2001, Journal of Bone and Mineral Research, Vol. 16, No. 2, pp. 338-347).
  • In one embodiment, the treatment is treatment of osteopetrosis, osteoarthritis, or ectopic bone formation.
    • Treatment
  • The term “treatment,” as used herein in the context of treating a condition, pertains generally to treatment and therapy, whether of a human or an animal (e.g., in veterinary applications), in which some desired therapeutic effect is achieved, for example, the inhibition of the progress of the condition, and includes a reduction in the rate of progress, a halt in the rate of progress, alleviatiation of symptoms of the condition, amelioration of the condition, and cure of the condition. Treatment as a prophylactic measure (i.e., prophylaxis) is also included. For example, use with patients who have not yet developed the condition, but who are at risk of developing the condition, is encompassed by the term “treatment.”
  • For example, use with perimenopausal women who may not yet have osteoporosis, but who are at risk of osteoporosis, is encompassed by the term “treatment.”
  • The term “therapeutically-effective amount,” as used herein, pertains to that amount of a compound, or a material, composition or dosage form comprising a compound, which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, when administered in accordance with a desired treatment regimen.
  • The term “treatment” includes combination treatments and therapies, in which two or more treatments or therapies are combined, for example, sequentially or simultaneously. Examples of treatments and therapies include, but are not limited to, chemotherapy (the administration of active agents, including, e.g., drugs, antibodies (e.g., as in immunotherapy), prodrugs (e.g., as in photodynamic therapy, GDEPT, ADEPT, etc.); surgery; radiation therapy; and gene therapy.
    • Other Uses
  • The APSAC compounds described herein may also be used as cell culture additives to inhibit immune cell function, for example, to inhibit the survival, formation, and/or activity of macrophages, T-cells, or other cells involved in the immune response.
  • The APSAC compounds, as described herein, may also be used as cell culture additives, for example, to inhibit osteoclasts, for example, to inhibit the survival, formation, and/or activity of osteoclasts.
  • The APSAC compounds described herein may also be used as part of an in vitro assay, for example, in order to determine whether a candidate host is likely to benefit from treatment with the compound in question.
  • The APSAC compounds described herein may also be used as a standard, for example, in an assay, in order to identify other active compounds, other osteoclast inhibitors, etc.
    • Kits
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to a kit comprising (a) an APSAC compound as described herein, or a composition comprising an APSAC compound as described herein, e.g., preferably provided in a suitable container and/or with suitable packaging; and (b) instructions for use, e.g., written instructions on how to administer the compound or composition.
  • The written instructions may also include a list of indications for which the APSAC compound is a suitable treatment.
    • Routes of Administration
  • The APSAC compound or pharmaceutical composition comprising the APSAC compound may be administered to a subject by any convenient route of administration, whether systemically/peripherally or topically (i.e., at the site of desired action).
  • Routes of administration include, but are not limited to, oral (e.g., by ingestion); buccal; sublingual; transdermal (including, e.g., by a patch, plaster, etc.); transmucosal (including, e.g., by a patch, plaster, etc.); intranasal (e.g., by nasal spray); ocular (e.g., by eyedrops); pulmonary (e.g., by inhalation or insufflation therapy using, e.g., via an aerosol, e.g., through the mouth or nose); rectal (e.g., by suppository or enema); vaginal (e.g., by pessary); parenteral, for example, by injection, including subcutaneous, intradermal, intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intracardiac, intrathecal, intraspinal, intracapsular, subcapsular, intraorbital, intraperitoneal, intratracheal, subcuticular, intraarticular, subarachnoid, and intrasternal; by implant of a depot or reservoir, for example, subcutaneously or intramuscularly.
    • The Subject/Patient
  • The subject/patient may be a chordate, a vertebrate, a mammal, a placental mammal, a marsupial (e.g., kangaroo, wombat), a rodent (e.g., a guinea pig, a hamster, a rat, a mouse), murine (e.g., a mouse), a lagomorph (e.g., a rabbit), avian (e.g., a bird), canine (e.g., a dog), feline (e.g., a cat), equine (e.g., a horse), porcine (e.g., a pig), ovine (e.g., a sheep), bovine (e.g., a cow), a primate, simian (e.g., a monkey or ape), a monkey (e.g., marmoset, baboon), an ape (e.g., gorilla, chimpanzee, orangutang, gibbon), or a human.
  • Furthermore, the subject/patient may be any of its forms of development, for example, a foetus.
  • In one preferred embodiment, the subject/patient is a human.
    • Formulations
  • While it is possible for the APSAC compound to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., composition, preparation, medicament) comprising at least one APSAC compound, as described herein, together with one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients well known to those skilled in the art, including, but not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, diluents, excipients, adjuvants, fillers, buffers, preservatives, anti-oxidants, lubricants, stabilisers, solubilisers, surfactants (e.g., wetting agents), masking agents, colouring agents, flavouring agents, and sweetening agents. The formulation may further comprise other active agents, for example, other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.
  • Thus, the present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions, as defined above, and methods of making a pharmaceutical composition comprising admixing at least one APSAC compound, as described herein, together with one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients well known to those skilled in the art, e.g., carriers, diluents, excipients, etc. If formulated as discrete units (e.g., tablets, etc.), each unit contains a predetermined amount (dosage) of the compound.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable,” as used herein, pertains to compounds, ingredients, materials, compositions, dosage forms, etc., which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of the subject in question (e.g., human) without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Each carrier, diluent, excipient, etc. must also be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation.
  • Suitable carriers, diluents, excipients, etc. can be found in standard pharmaceutical texts, for example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th edition, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1990; and Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, 5th edition, 2005.
  • The formulations may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the compound with a carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the compound with carriers (e.g., liquid carriers, finely divided solid carrier, etc.), and then shaping the product, if necessary.
  • The formulation may be prepared to provide for rapid or slow release; immediate, delayed, timed, or sustained release; or a combination thereof.
  • Formulations may suitably be in the form of liquids, solutions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), suspensions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil), elixirs, syrups, electuaries, mouthwashes, drops, tablets (including, e.g., coated tablets), granules, powders, losenges, pastilles, capsules (including, e.g., hard and soft gelatin capsules), cachets, pills, ampoules, boluses, suppositories, pessaries, tinctures, gels, pastes, ointments, creams, lotions, oils, foams, sprays, mists, or aerosols.
  • Formulations may suitably be provided as a patch, adhesive plaster, bandage, dressing, or the like which is impregnated with one or more compounds and optionally one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients, including, for example, penetration, permeation, and absorption enhancers. Formulations may also suitably be provided in the form of a depot or reservoir.
  • The compound may be dissolved in, suspended in, or admixed with one or more other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients. The compound may be presented in a liposome or other microparticulate which is designed to target the compound, for example, to blood components or one or more organs.
  • Formulations suitable for oral administration (e.g., by ingestion) include liquids, solutions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), suspensions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil), elixirs, syrups, electuaries, tablets, granules, powders, capsules, cachets, pills, ampoules, boluses.
  • Formulations suitable for buccal administration include mouthwashes, losenges, pastilles, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, depots, and reservoirs. Losenges typically comprise the compound in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth. Pastilles typically comprise the compound in an inert matrix, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia. Mouthwashes typically comprise the compound in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • Formulations suitable for sublingual administration include tablets, losenges, pastilles, capsules, and pills.
  • Formulations suitable for oral transmucosal administration include liquids, solutions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), suspensions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil), mouthwashes, losenges, pastilles, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, depots, and reservoirs.
  • Formulations suitable for non-oral transmucosal administration include liquids, solutions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), suspensions (e.g., aqueous, non-aqueous), emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water, water-in-oil), suppositories, pessaries, gels, pastes, ointments, creams, lotions, oils, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, depots, and reservoirs.
  • Formulations suitable for transdermal administration include gels, pastes, ointments, creams, lotions, and oils, as well as patches, adhesive plasters, bandages, dressings, depots, and reservoirs.
  • Tablets may be made by conventional means, e.g., compression or moulding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the compound in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with one or more binders (e.g., povidone, gelatin, acacia, sorbitol, tragacanth, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose); fillers or diluents (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc, silica); disintegrants (e.g., sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose); surface-active or dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate); preservatives (e.g., methyl p-hydroxybenzoate, propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, sorbic acid); flavours, flavour enhancing agents, and sweeteners. Moulded tablets may be made by moulding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the compound therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile. Tablets may optionally be provided with a coating, for example, to affect release, for example an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach.
  • Ointments are typically prepared from the compound and a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base.
  • Creams are typically prepared from the compound and an oil-in-water cream base. If desired, the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least about 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane-1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof. The topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the compound through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethylsulfoxide and related analogues.
  • Emulsions are typically prepared from the compound and an oily phase, which may optionally comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), or it may comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabiliser. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat. Together, the emulsifier(s) with or without stabiliser(s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and/or fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations.
  • Suitable emulgents and emulsion stabilisers include Tween 60, Span 80, cetostearyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate and sodium lauryl sulfate. The choice of suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties, since the solubility of the compound in most oils likely to be used in pharmaceutical emulsion formulations may be very low. Thus the cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non-staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers. Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required. Alternatively, high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils can be used.
  • Formulations suitable for intranasal administration, where the carrier is a liquid, include, for example, nasal spray, nasal drops, or by aerosol administration by nebuliser, include aqueous or oily solutions of the compound.
  • Formulations suitable for intranasal administration, where the carrier is a solid, include, for example, those presented as a coarse powder having a particle size, for example, in the range of about 20 to about 500 microns which is administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e., by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose.
  • Formulations suitable for pulmonary administration (e.g., by inhalation or insufflation therapy) include those presented as an aerosol spray from a pressurised pack, with the use of a suitable propellant, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichoro-tetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide, or other suitable gases.
  • Formulations suitable for ocular administration include eye drops wherein the compound is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the compound.
  • Formulations suitable for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising, for example, natural or hardened oils, waxes, fats, semi-liquid or liquid polyols, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate; or as a solution or suspension for treatment by enema.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the compound, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration (e.g., by injection), include aqueous or non-aqueous, isotonic, pyrogen-free, sterile liquids (e.g., solutions, suspensions), in which the compound is dissolved, suspended, or otherwise provided (e.g., in a liposome or other microparticulate). Such liquids may additional contain other pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients, such as anti-oxidants, buffers, preservatives, stabilisers, bacteriostats, suspending agents, thickening agents, and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood (or other relevant bodily fluid) of the intended recipient. Examples of excipients include, for example, water, alcohols, polyols, glycerol, vegetable oils, and the like. Examples of suitable isotonic carriers for use in such formulations include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Solution, or Lactated Ringer's Injection. Typically, the concentration of the compound in the liquid is from about 1 ng/mL to about 100 μg/mL, for example from about 10 ng/mL to about 10 μg/mL, for example from about 10 ng/mL to about 1 μg/mL. The formulations may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilised) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets.
    • Dosage
  • It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that appropriate dosages of the APSAC compounds, and compositions comprising the APSAC compounds, can vary from patient to patient. Determining the optimal dosage will generally involve the balancing of the level of therapeutic benefit against any risk or deleterious side effects. The selected dosage level will depend on a variety of factors including, but not limited to, the activity of the particular APSAC compound, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the APSAC compound, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds, and/or materials used in combination, the severity of the condition, and the species, sex, age, weight, condition, general health, and prior medical history of the patient. The amount of APSAC compound and route of administration will ultimately be at the discretion of the physician, veterinarian, or clinician, although generally the dosage will be selected to achieve local concentrations at the site of action which achieve the desired effect without causing substantial harmful or deleterious side-effects.
  • Administration can be effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently (e.g., in divided doses at appropriate intervals) throughout the course of treatment. Methods of determining the most effective means and dosage of administration are well known to those of skill in the art and will vary with the formulation used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target cell(s) being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations can be carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician, veterinarian, or clinician.
  • In general, a suitable dose of the APSAC compound is in the range of about 10 μg to about 250 mg (more typically about 100 μg to about 25 mg) per kilogram body weight of the subject per day. Where the compound is a salt, an ester, an amide, a prodrug, or the like, the amount administered is calculated on the basis of the parent compound and so the actual weight to be used is increased proportionately.
    • Examples
  • The following examples are provided solely to illustrate the present invention and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention, as described herein.
    • Chemical Synthesis Synthesis 1 4-Bromo-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD598)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00193
  • Method A:
  • 4-Bromobenzene sulfonyl chloride (1 g) was dissolved in DCM (30 mL). Trans-4-aminocyclohexanol hydrochloride (1 g) was added, followed by pyridine (3 mL). The mixture was stirred for 3 hours, giving a brick red suspension, and then poured into 2 M HCl and separated. The organic phase was collected and the aqueous phase washed with ethyl acetate. The two organic phases were combined and the resultant solution was dried and evaporated to give an orange residue. The residue was recrystallised from ethyl acetate/petrol, filtered and the resultant powder boiled with ether and the title compound obtained as a white powder. 13C NMR (62.5 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 31.0, 33.6, 51.8, 67.6, 125.9, 128.3, 132.1 and 141.5.
    • Synthesis 2 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD599)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00194
  • Method B:
  • ABD598 (1.0 g) was dissolved in a mixture of toluene (15 mL) and ethanol (15 mL). 2,4-Difluorophenylboronic acid (1 g) was added followed by (PPh3)4Pd (0.15 g). The mixture was stirred vigorously under N2 and 2 M Na2CO3 (15 mL) added. The mixture was refluxed with stirring for 3 hours under an atmosphere of N2. The organic solvents were removed under vacuum, the residue dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water and saturated NaCl solution. After drying (Na2SO4), the solvent was evaporated and the brown residue was purified by column chromatography (ethyl acetate/petrol) and the title compound was obtained as a white powder (0.4 g). 1H NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.15 (4H, m), 1.70 (4H, m), 2.92 (1H, m), 3.28 (1H, m), 4.51 (1H, d, J=4.3 Hz), 7.23 (1H, t, J=8.5 Hz), 7.42 (1H, t, J=9.2 Hz), 7.66 (2H, m), 7.74 (2H, d, J=8.2 Hz) and 7.90 (2H, d, J=8.2 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 367.11. Found, 367.32 (M).
    • Synthesis 3 4′-Chloro,2′-fluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD655)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00195
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD598 and 4-chloro, 2-fluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.11 (4H, m), 1.66 (4H, m), 2.94 (1H, s), 3.30 (1H, s), 4.49 (1H, d, J=4.3 Hz), 7.43 (1H, d, J=8.2 Hz), 7.58 (1H, s), 7.63 (1H, d, J=7.3 Hz), 7.68 (1H, m), 7.76 (2H, d, J=7.6 Hz) and 7.91 (2H, d, J=8.2 Hz). 13C NMR (62.5 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 31.1, 33.6, 51.8, 67.6, 116.7, 125.3, 125.9 (d, J=13.7 Hz), 126.5, 129.7, 132.0, 133.9, 137.6, 141.8, 159.0 (d, J=251.0 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 383.076. Found, 383.25 (M).
    • Synthesis 4 2′,4′-Difluorobiphenylsulfonyl chloride
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00196
  • 2,4-Difluorophenylboronic acid (15 g, 129 mmol) was added to a solution of bromobenzene (19.8 g, 126 mmol) in DME (500 mL). To this was added a solution of sodium carbonate (55.8 g, 520 mmol) in water (260 mL). The solution was degassed by bubbling argon through the mixture and then stirred under argon. Pd(dppf)Cl2 (1.5 g, 2.1 mmol) was added and the mixture heated overnight at 90° C. under argon. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and water (150 mL) and ethyl acetate (500 mL) were added. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with 2 M NaOH (100 mL), water (100 mL) and brine (100 mL). The black ethyl acetate layer was dried over MgSO4, charcoal was added, and the mixture was filtered through a short pad of silica. Evaporation of the solvents gave 2,4-difluorobiphenyl as a brown oil, which crystallised on standing (21.2 g).
  • 2,4-Difluorobiphenyl (21.2 g, 111 mmol) was dissolved in chloroform (120 mL) and chlorosulfonic acid (12.5 mL, 188 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue taken up into EtOAc (100 mL) and washed with water (3×25 mL). The organics were shaken with brine, whereupon a flocculent solid formed. This was filtered and washed with EtOAc and dried to give 2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonic acid as an off-white solid (12.1 g).
  • 2′,4′-Difluorobiphenyl-4-sulphonic acid (12.1 g, 47 mmol) was suspended in thionyl chloride (100 mL). The mixture was heated at reflux for 30 minutes, when a catalytic amount of dry DMF was added and the reaction mixture was heated at reflux for a further 4 hours. The reaction mixture was then cooled, the thionyl chloride evaporated and the residue was then azeotroped with toluene (3×10 mL). The resulting yellow/orange gum was taken up into EtOAc (250 mL) and washed with water (50 mL) and brine (50 mL), and dried over MgSO4. Filtration and evaporation gave the title compound as a brown oil which crystallized on standing (11 g).
    • Synthesis 5 (1R,3S)-Methyl 3-aminocyclopentanecarboxylate hydrochloride
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00197
  • A suspension of (1R,3S)-3-aminocyclopentanecarboxylic acid (500 mg, 3.8 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) was stirred at 0° C. and thionyl chloride (1.40 mL, 19.3 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The resulting clear solution was evaporated, azeotroped with methanol (2×5 mL), air-dried and the title compound obtained as a white powder (680 mg).
    • Synthesis 6 (1R,3S)-Methyl 3-(2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)cyclopentanecarboxylate (ABD773a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00198
  • Using a method analogous to Method A, using (1R,3S)-methyl 3-aminocyclopentanecarboxylate and 2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulphonyl chloride, the title compound was obtained as a pale yellow gum.
    • Synthesis 7 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-((1S,3R)-3-(hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD773)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00199
  • A solution of 1 M LiAlH4 in THF (1.85 mL, 1.85 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of ABD773a (148 mg, 0.37 mmol) in THF (5 mL) at 0° C., then stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was partitioned between water (10 mL) and EtOAc (20 mL), separated and the aqueous layer extracted with further EtOAc (10 mL). The organic phase was washed with brine (10 mL) and dried over MgSO4. The solvent was evaporated, the residue purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, 20% acetone/hexane) and the title compound obtained as a light brown gum (133 mg). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.24-1.27 (2H, m), 1.50-1.58 (2H, m), 1.66-1.76 (2H, m), 1.96-2.08 (1H, m), 2.12-2.22 (1H, m), 3.59 (2H, m), 3.70-3.78 (1H, m), 5.25-5.30 (1H, m), 6.90-7.10 (2H, m), 7.42-7.48 (1H, m), 7.63 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.93 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 367.11. Found, 368.07 (M+H).
    • Synthesis 8 Methyl trans-4-aminocyclohexanecarboxylate
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00200
  • A suspension of trans-4-amino-cyclohexancarboxylic acid (5.0 g, 34.9 mmol) in methanol (50 mL) was stirred at room temperature and SOCl2 (7.14 mL, 11.7 g, 98.4 mmol) was added dropwise over 20 minutes. The solid dissolved, giving a brown solution, which was stirred overnight. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure, giving a brown solid, which was triturated with ether, redissolved in methanol (20 mL) and again evaporated to give a slightly sticky brown solid (6.52 g). A portion of the product (820 mg) was dissolved in methanol (10 mL) and split in two batches, each of which was loaded onto a 5 g SCX column. These were eluted with MeOH (2×10 mL) and then 2 M NH3/MeOH (4×10 mL), and the title compound obtained as a beige solid (425 mg combined).
    • Synthesis 9 Methyl 4-(2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)trans-cyclohexanecarboxylate (ABD776a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00201
  • Using a method analogous to Method A with 2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonyl chloride and methyl trans-4-aminocyclohexanecarboxylate, the title compound was obtained as a white solid.
    • Synthesis 10 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(4-(trans-hydroxymethyl)cyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD776)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00202
  • A solution of ABD776a (100 mg, 0.24 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was cooled to 0° C. under argon and 1 M LiAlH4 in THF (1.22 mL, 1.22 mmol) was added by syringe. The mixture was stirred overnight, allowing it to warm to room temperature. The solution was then cooled to 0° C. before saturated NH4Cl (5 mL) and EtOAc (20 mL) were added. The mixture was filtered through Celite and the layers separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with further EtOAc (3×5 mL) and the combined organics were washed with 1 M HCl (10 mL), water (10 mL) and brine (10 mL) and dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of the solvents afforded a brown gum, which was purified by SP4 chromatography (10 g Isolute II SiO2 cartridge, 10-30% acetone/hexane) to give a light brown gum. Final purification by reverse phase HPLC (40-48.5% NH4OH/H2O in CH3CN) gave the title compound as a white solid (28 mg). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ 0.99 (2H, q, J=9 Hz), 1.18 (2H, q, J=9 Hz), 1.34-1.45 (1H, m), 1.78 (2H, d, J=12 Hz), 1.93 (2H, d, J=12 Hz), 3.07-3.19 (1H, m), 3.42 (2H, t, J=5 Hz), 4.32 (1H, d, J=8 Hz), 6.88-7.02 (2H, m), 7.38-7.46 (1H, m), 7.65 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.94 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 381.121. Found, 381.59 (M).
    • Synthesis 11 4-Bromo-N-(4-oxocyclohexyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD777b)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00203
  • Jones' reagent was prepared by dissolving CrO3 (1.33 g, 13.3 mmol) in concentrated H2SO4 (1.15 mL) and diluting the mixture up to 5 mL with water. A solution of ABD598 (390 mg, 1.17 mmol) in acetone (15 mL) was stirred at room temperature and Jones' reagent was added dropwise until an orange colour persisted. TLC indicated complete consumption of the starting material and the formation of a new, less polar, compound. The mixture was filtered through Celite, the solvent was evaporated and the residue taken up in EtOAc (50 mL). The solution was washed with water (2×10 mL) and 10% aqueous Na2S2O3 (2×10 mL) and dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of the solvent gave the title compound as a white solid (390 mg).
    • Synthesis 12 4-Bromo-N-(cis-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD777a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00204
  • A solution of ABD777b (205 mg, 0.62 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was cooled to 0° C. under argon. 1 M LS-Selectride in THF (1.32 mL, 1.32 mmol) was added by syringe and the solution was stirred for 1 hour. Water (1 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes before being diluted with EtOAc (20 mL) and 1 M HCl (4 mL). The layers were separated and the organic phase was washed with water (5 mL) and brine (5 mL) and dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of the solvents afforded a colourless oil which was purified by SP4 chromatography (20 g Isolute II SiO2 cartridge, eluting with 0-40% acetone/hexane) and the title compound obtained as a white solid (165 mg).
    • Synthesis 13 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(cis-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD777)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00205
  • Method C:
  • ABD777a (160 mg, 0.48 mmol), 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid (113 mg, 0.72 mmol) and 1 M Na2CO3 solution (1 mL, 1 mmol) were stirred in DME and the flask was flushed with argon. Pd(dppf)Cl2 (17 mg, 0.02 mmol) was added and the flask was placed into an oil bath that had been pre-heated to 90° C. and stirred for 1.5 hours. The mixture was cooled, poured into EtOAc (30 mL) and washed with water (5 mL) and brine (5 mL). The solvents were dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to afford a dark oil, which was purified by SP4 chromatography twice (20 g Isolute II SiO2 column, eluting with 0-40% acetone/hexane, then 10 g Isolute II SiO2 column, eluting with 0-40% acetone/hexane) to give a colourless glassy solid. This was triturated with ether/hexane and the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.24-1.40 (4H, m), 1.40-1.59 (4H, m), 2.98 (1H, br s), 3.55 (1H, br s), 4.32 (1H, d, J=3 Hz), 7.21 (1H, td, J=17, 2 Hz), 7.40 (1H, td, J=20, 3 Hz), 7.60-7.80 (3H, m) and 7.88 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 367.105. Found, 367.31 (M).
    • Synthesis 14 Methyl cis-4-aminocyclohexanecarboxylate
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00206
  • A suspension of cis-4-aminocyclohexanecarboxylic acid (5.0 g, 34.9 mmol) in methanol (50 mL) was stirred at room temperature and SOCl2 (7.1 mL, 98.4 mmol) was added dropwise over 20 minutes, causing the solid to dissolve. The solution was stirred overnight and the methanol was then removed under reduced pressure. The residual solid was triturated with diethyl ether and air-dried and the title compound obtained as an off-white powder (6.0 g).
    • Synthesis 15 Methyl 4-(4-bromophenylsulfonamido)cis-cyclohexanecarboxylate (ABD781 b)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00207
  • Using a method analogous to Method A with 4-bromophenylsulfonyl chloride and methyl cis-4-aminocyclohexanecarboxylate, the title compound was obtained as a pale brown solid.
    • Synthesis 16 Methyl 4-(2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)cis-cyclohexanecarboxylate (ABD781a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00208
  • Using a method analogous to Method A with 2′,4′-difluorophenylsulfonyl chloride and ABD781b, the title compound was obtained as an orange gum.
    • Synthesis 17 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(cis-4-(hydroxymethyl)cyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD781)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00209
  • A solution of ABD781a (123 mg, 0.30 mmol) in dry THF (3 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and 1 M LiAlH4 in THF (1.5 mL, 1.5 mmol) was added by syringe. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours, whilst warming to room temperature. Ice and water were then added and the mixture was adjusted to pH 2 with 2 M HCl and extracted with EtOAc (4×10 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine (10 mL), dried over MgSO4 and evaporated. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, 30%-40% acetone/hexane) and then trituration with ether/hexane gave the title compound as a white solid (64 mg). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.15-1.30 (2H, m), 1.50-1.70 (7H, m), 3.45-3.56 (3H, m), 4.63 (1H, d, J=7 Hz), 6.91-7.04 (2H, m), 7.43 (1H, td, J=9 Hz, 7 Hz), 7.65 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.93 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 381.12. Found, 381.25 (M).
    • Synthesis 18 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(4-oxocyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD786)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00210
  • Using a method analogous to Method C, with ABD777b and 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.63 (2H, m), 1.85 (2H, m), 2.25 (4H, m), 3.51 (1H, br m), 7.22 (1H, td, J=9 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.41 (1H, ddd, J=12 Hz, 8 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.65 (1H, td, J=8 Hz, 7 Hz), 7.74 (2H, dd, J=8 Hz, 2 Hz), 7.92 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.97 (1H, br s). MS, m/z: Calcd, 365.09. Found, 365.52 (M).
    • Synthesis 19 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(trans-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)cyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD794)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00211
  • A solution of ABD776a (100 mg, 0.24 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. 3 M Methylmagnesium bromide solution in Et2O (25 μL, 0.75 mmol) was added by syringe and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours, allowing it to warm to room temperature. The solution was cooled to 0° C. and saturated NH4Cl solution (2 mL) was added, followed by water to dissolve the solids. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×10 mL) and the combined extracts were washed with brine (5 mL) and water (5 mL) and dried over MgSO4. The solvents were evaporated to afford a brown gum, which was purified by SP4 chromatography (10 g Isolute II SiO2 cartridge, 10-40% acetone/hexane) to give a glassy solid (64 mg). The title compound was obtained as a white solid by reverse phase HPLC (50-55% NH4OH/CH3CN) (31 mg). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.13 (6H, s), 1.00-1.30 (4H, m), 1.81 (2H, d, J=12 Hz), 1.95 (2H, d, J=12 Hz), 3.05-3.16 (1H, m), 4.29 (1H, d, J=7 Hz), 6.89-7.02 (2H, m), 7.43 (1H, m), 7.63 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.93 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 409.152. Found, 409.59 (M).
    • Synthesis 20 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(cis-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)cyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD795)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00212
  • A solution of ABD781a (300 mg, 0.73 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and 3 M methylmagnesium bromide in Et2O (0.97 mL, 2.93 mmol) was added by syringe. The ice bath was removed and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Saturated NH4Cl (2 mL) was then added and the mixture was stirred a further 10 minutes before being diluted with water (10 mL) and diethyl ether (20 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with diethyl ether (2×10 mL). The combined organics were dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to give an off-white foamy solid. This was triturated with diethyl ether/hexane (1:1, 3×5 mL) and the title compound obtained as a white powder (250 mg). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 0.96 (6H, s), 1.06 (1H, t, J=6 Hz), 1.16-1.34 (4H, m), 1.39-1.47 (2H, m), 1.53-1.60 (2H, m), 3.22 (1H, br s), 7.22 (1H, t, J=7 Hz), 7.39 (1H, t, J=9 Hz), 7.60-7.70 (1H, m), 7.72 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.88 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 409.152. Found, 409.59 (M).
    • Synthesis 21 (1R,3S)-Methyl 3-(4-bromophenylsulfonamido)cyclopentanecarboxylate (ABD796b)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00213
  • Using a method analogous to Method A, with (1R,3S)-methyl 3-aminocyclopentanecarboxylate and 4-bromobenzenesulphonyl chloride, the title compound was obtained as a light brown gum.
    • Synthesis 22 4-Bromo-N-((1S,3R)-3-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)cyclopentyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD796a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00214
  • 3 M Methylmagnesium bromide in ether (360 μL, 1.08 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of ABD796b (130 mg, 0.36 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. Saturated ammonium chloride solution (3 mL) was added and the THF layer was separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with THF (2×10 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed with brine and dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of the solvent gave the title compound as a brown gum.
    • Synthesis 23 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-((1S,3R)-3-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)cyclopentyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD796)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00215
  • Using a method analogous to Method C with ABD796a and 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.15 (3H, s), 1.18 (3H, s), 1.40-1.45 (2H, m), 1.50-1.70 (4H, m), 1.80-1.95 (2H, m), 3.71-3.74 (1H, m), 5.53 (1H, d, J=9 Hz), 6.90-7.10 (2H, m), 7.35-7.45 (1H, m), 7.63 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.93 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 395.137. Found, 395.59 (M).
    • Synthesis 24 N-(cis-4-(Dimethylamino)cyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD798)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00216
  • A solution of ABD786 (200 mg, 0.55 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was stirred at room temperature and 2 M dimethylamine in THF (0.55 mL, 1.10 mmol) was added by syringe. The solution was cooled to 0° C. under argon and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (150 mg, 0.71 mmol) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and then at room temperature overnight. TLC indicated incomplete reaction so further 2 M dimethylamine in THF (0.5 mL, 1 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (100 mg, 0.47 mmol) were added. After a further 24 hours, 2 M NaOH (3 mL) was added. The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with diethyl ether (2×10 mL). The combined organic solvents were dried over MgSO4 and then evaporated to afford a viscous yellow oil. This was dissolved in MeOH (5 mL) and loaded onto a 5 g SCX-2 column, which was eluted with MeOH (2×10 mL) and then with 25% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM (5×10 mL). The fractions containing a UV-active component were combined and evaporated to afford the target compound as a pale yellow oil (230 mg, 1:1 mixture of isomers). The crude mixture of isomers (150 mg) was separated by preparative HPLC and the title compound obtained as a white solid (28 mg). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.15-1.31 (2H, m), 1.53-1.75 (2H, br s), 1.85 (2H, br d, J=6 Hz), 1.95 (2H, br d, J=6 Hz), 2.13 (1H, br t, J=5 Hz), 2.24 (6H, s), 3.13 (1H, br t, J=5 Hz), 4.35 (1H, br s), 6.92-7.02 (2H, m), 7.44 (1H, td, J=9 Hz, 7 Hz), 7.63 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.93 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 394.153. Found, 394.29 (M).
    • Synthesis 25 N-(trans-4-(Dimethylamino)cyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD799)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00217
  • The title compound was obtained as a white solid by preparative HPLC of the mixture of isomers obtained in the previous synthesis. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.45-1.75 (8H, m), 2.07 (1H, br s), 2.23 (6H, s), 3.45 (1H, br s), 4.58 (1H, br s), 6.92-7.02 (2H, m), 7.44 (1H, td, J=9 Hz, 7 Hz), 7.63 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.92 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). MS, m/z:
  • Calcd, 394.153. Found, 394.29 (M).
    • Synthesis 26 4-Bromo-3-fluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD665a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00218
  • Method D:
  • 4-Bromo-3-fluorobenzene sulfonyl chloride (1 g) was dissolved in DCM (30 mL). Trans-4-aminocyclohexanol (1 g) was added and the mixture stirred overnight. Pyridine (3 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 3 hours, poured into 2 M HCl and separated. The organic phase was collected and the aqueous phase washed with ethyl acetate. The two organic phases were combined and the resultant solution was dried and evaporated to give an off-white residue. The residue was recrystallised from diethyl ether/petrol, to give the title compound as a white powder.
    • Synthesis 27 2-Fluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-4′-(trifluoromethoxy)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD665)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00219
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD665a and 4-trifluoromethoxyphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.06-1.20 (4H, m), 1.66 (4H, m), 2.97 (1H, br s), 3.32 (1H, br s), 4.51 (1H, d, J=4.3 Hz), 7.52 (2H, d, J=8.2 Hz), and 7.74 (6H, m).
    • Synthesis 28 2′,5′-Difluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD679)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00220
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD598 and 2,5-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.02-1.20 (4H, m), 1.60-1.72 (4H, m), 2.94 (1H, m), 3.29 (1H, m), 4.49 (1H, d, J=4.2 Hz), 7.32 (1H, m), 7.42 (1H, m), 7.52 (1H, m), 7.73 (1H, d, J=7.2 Hz), 7.76 (2H, d, J=7.8 Hz), and 7.90 (2H, d, J=8.7 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 367.11. Found, 366.1 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 29 2′-Chloro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD682)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00221
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD598 and 2-chlorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.01-1.20 (4H, m), 1.60-1.72 (4H, m), 2.94 (1H, m), 3.29 (1H, m), 4.47 (1H, d, J=4.2 Hz), 7.45 (3H, m), 7.59 (1H, m), 7.63 (2H, d, J=8.4 Hz), 7.72 (1H, m), and 7.88 (2H, d, J=8.4 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 365.09. Found, 364.6 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 30 N-(trans-4-Hydroxycyclohexyl)-3′-(trifluoromethyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD683)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00222
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD598 and 3-trifluoromethylphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.00-1.20 (4H, m), 1.59-1.71 (4H, m), 2.92 (1H, m), 3.30 (1H, m), 4.47 (1H, d, J=4.2 Hz), 7.68-7.78 (3H, m), 7.89 (2H, d, J=8.4 Hz), 7.97 (2H, d, J=8.4 Hz), and 8.06 (2H, m). MS, m/z: Calcd, 399.11. Found, 398.5 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 31 4-Bromo-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-2-(trifluoromethoxy)benzenesulfonamide (ABD684a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00223
  • Using a method analogous to Method D, with 4-bromo-2-trifluoromethoxybenzene sulfonyl chloride and trans-4-aminocyclohexanol, the title compound was obtained as a white powder.
    • Synthesis 32 N-(trans-4-Hydroxycyclohexyl)-4′-methyl-3-(trifluoromethoxy)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD684)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00224
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD684a and 4-methylphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.07 (2H, m), 1.25 (2H, m), 1.63 (2H, m), 1.72 (2H, m), 2.36 (3H, s), 3.05 (1H, m), 3.27 (1H, m), 4.49 (1H, d, J=4.2 Hz), 7.32 (2H, d, J=8.1 Hz), 7.66 (2H, d, J=8.1 Hz), 7.69 (1H, s), 7.84 (2H, m) and 7.97 (1H, d, J=8.4 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 429.12. Found, 428.5 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 33 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-3-(trifluoromethoxy)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD689)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00225
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD684a and 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.08 (2H, m), 1.23 (2H, m), 1.63-1.76 (4H, m), 3.09 (1H, m), 3.31 (1H, m), 4.50 (1H, m), 7.26 (1H, t, J=8.4 Hz), 7.48 (1H, t, J=9.0 Hz), 7.65 (1H, s), 7.71 (2H, m), 7.92 (1H, d, J=7.5 Hz) and 8.01 (1H, d, J=8.1 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 451.09. Found, 450.5 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 34 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-3-methylbiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD699)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00226
  • Using a method analogous to Method D, with 2′,4′-difluoro-3-methylbiphenyl sulfonyl chloride and trans-4-aminocyclohexanol, the title compound was obtained as a clear oil which solidified on standing. 1H NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.10 (2H, m), 1.29 (2H, m), 1.58-1.75 (4H, m), 2.62 (3H, s), 2.94 (1H, br s), 3.31 (1H, br s), 4.50 (1H, s), 7.20 (1H, br t), 7.37 (1H, br t), 7.52 (2H, m), 7.63 (1H, br d), 7.72 (1H, br d) and 7.90 (1H, br d).
    • Synthesis 35 4-Bromo-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-3-methylbenzenesulfonamide (ABD702a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00227
  • Using a method analogous to Method D, with 4-bromo-3-methylbenzene sulfonyl chloride and trans-4-aminocyclohexanol, the title compound was obtained as a white powder.
    • Synthesis 36 4′-Fluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-2-methylbiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD702)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00228
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD702a and 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.05-1.21 (4H, m), 1.71 (4H, m), 2.29 (3H, s), 2.91 (1H, m), 3.30 (1H, m), 4.47 (1H, m), 7.29 (2H, t, J=9.0 Hz), 7.43 (3H, m), 7.67 (2H, m) and 7.89 (1H, s). MS, m/z: Calcd, 363.13. Found, 362.73 (M).
    • Synthesis 37 4′-Cyano-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-2-methylbiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD703)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00229
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD702a and 4-cyanophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.05-1.21 (4H, m), 1.70 (4H, m), 2.29 (3H, s), 2.93 (1H, m), 3.28 (1H, m), 4.47 (1H, d. J=4.2 Hz), 7.43 (1H, d, J=8.1 Hz), 7.62 (2H, d, J=8.1 Hz), 7.68 (2H, m), 7.75 (1H, s) and 7.89 (2H, d, J=8.1 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 370.14. Found, 369.7 (M).
    • Synthesis 38 4-Bromo-2-chloro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD704a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00230
  • Using a method analogous to Method D, with 4-bromo-2-chlorobenzene sulfonyl chloride and trans-4-aminocyclohexanol, the title compound was obtained as a white powder.
    • Synthesis 39 3-Chloro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-4′-methylbiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD704)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00231
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD704a and 4-methylphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.70 (2H, m), 1.88 (2H, m), 2.22 (4H, m), 2.37 (3H, s), 3.57 (1H, m), 7.33 (2H, d, J=7.2 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=8.1 Hz), 7.83 (1H, d, J=8.4 Hz), 7.95 (1H, s), 8.06 (1H, d, J=8.1 Hz) and 8.15 (1H, d, J=7.5 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 379.10. Found, 378.20 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 40 3-Chloro-2′,4′-difluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD705)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00232
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD704a and 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 1.08 (2H, m), 1.26 (2H, m), 1.67 (4H, m), 2.99 (1H, br s), 3.28 (1H, m), 4.51 (1H, d, J=4.3 Hz), 7.24 (1H, t, J=9.1 Hz), 7.43 (1H, t, J=9.1 Hz), 7.69 (1H, d, J=7.9 Hz), 7.72 (1H, d, J=7.9 Hz), 7.81 (1H, s), 7.93 (1H, d, J=7.6 Hz) and 8.07 (1H, d, J=8.2 Hz).
    • Synthesis 41 4′-Ethoxy-2-fluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD706)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00233
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD665a and 4-ethoxyphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.05-1.16 (4H, m), 1.34 (3H, t, J=6.9 Hz), 1.69 (4H, m), 2.94 (1H, m), 3.29 (1H, m), 4.08 (2H, q, J=6.9 Hz), 4.48 (1H, d. J=4.2 Hz), 7.05 (2H, d, J=8.7 Hz), 7.55 (2H, d, J=7.2 Hz) and 7.66-7.77 (4H, m). MS, m/z: Calcd, 393.14. Found, 392.47 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 42 2-Fluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-4′-methoxybiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD710)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00234
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD665a and 4-methoxyphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 1.15 (4H, m), 1.70 (4H, m), 2.99 (1H, br s), 3.32 (1H, m), 3.81 (3H, s), 4.50 (1H, s), 7.06 (2H, d, J=7.9 Hz), 7.55 (2H, d, J=7.9 Hz), 7.70 (3H, m) and 7.82 (1H, d, J=7.9 Hz).
    • Synthesis 43 4′-Chloro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-3′-(trifluoromethyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD712)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00235
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD598 and 4-chloro-3-trifluoromethylphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 13C NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 31.1, 33.6, 51.8, 67.6, 126.8, 127.1, 127.3, 127.6, 127.9, 130.8, 132.5, 138.1, 140.8, and 142.0. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 1.05-1.22 (4H, m), 1.70 (4H, m), 2.93 (1H, br s), 3.32 (1H, br s), 4.51 (1H, d, J=4.0 Hz), 7.75 (1H, d, J=7.0 Hz), 7.82 (1H, d, J=8.5 Hz), 7.91 (2H, d, J=8.5 Hz), 7.97 (2H, d, J=7.6 Hz), 8.05 (1H, d, J=7.9 Hz) and 8.12 (1H, s).
    • Synthesis 44 2-Fluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-4′-(trifluoromethyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD714)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00236
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD665a and 4-trifluoromethylphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.05-1.17 (4H, m), 1.68 (4H, m), 2.96 (1H, m), 3.29 (1H, m), 4.49 (1H, d. J=4.2 Hz) and 7.59-7.87 (7H, m). MS, m/z: Calcd, 417.10. Found, 416.3 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 45 4′-Acetyl-3-chloro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD716)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00237
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD704a and 4-acetylphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.06 (2H, m), 1.23 (2H, m), 1.63-1.76 (4H, m), 2.62 (3H, s), 2.97 (1H, m), 3.28 (1H, m), 4.48 (1H, d, J=4.2 Hz), 7.90 (2H, m), 7.95 (2H, d, J=8.4 Hz), 8.04 (2H, m) and 8.07 (2H, d, J=9.0 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 407.10. Found, 406.5 (M−1), 408.3 (M+1).
    • Synthesis 46 4-Bromo-2-ethyl-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD730a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00238
  • Using a method analogous to Method D, with 4-bromo-2-ethylbenzene sulfonyl chloride and trans-4-aminocyclohexanol, the title compound was obtained as a white powder.
    • Synthesis 47 3-Ethyl-2′,4′-difluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD730)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00239
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD730a and 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.08 (2H, m), 1.23 (2H, m), 1.25 (3H, t, J=7.3 Hz), 1.68 (4H, m), 2.97 (1H, m), 3.01 (2H, q, J=7.3 Hz), 3.26 (1H, m), 4.48 (1H, d, J=4.5 Hz), 7.23 (1H, t, J=8.4 Hz), 7.43 (1H, t, J=9.0 Hz), 7.53 (1H, d, J=8.1 Hz), 7.56 (1H, s), 7.63 (1H, m), 7.75 (1H, d, J=7.8 Hz) and 7.92 (1H, d, J=8.1 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 395.14. Found, 394.3 (M−1).
    • Synthesis 48 3-Chloro-4′-cyano-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD732)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00240
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD704a and 4-cyanophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 13C NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 31.0, 33.7, 51.9, 67.7, 111.6, 118.6, 126.3, 128.2, 130.2, 131.2, 131.5, 133.0, 138.8, 141.5 and 143.2. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 1.03 (2H, m), 1.31 (2H, m), 1.67 (4H, m), 2.97 (1H, br s), 3.30 (1H, br s), 4.51 (1H, d, J=4.0 Hz) and 7.87-8.10 (8H, m).
    • Synthesis 49 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-2-methylbiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD735)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00241
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD702a and 2,4-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 1.11 (4H, m), 1.68 (4H, m), 2.20 (3H, s), 2.93 (1H, br s), 3.32 (1H, br s), 4.50 (1H, s), 7.19 (1H, m), 7.39 (1H, m), 7.40 (2H, d, J=8.2 Hz), 7.69 (2H, m) and 7.77 (1H, s). 13C NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 19.6, 31.1, 33.6, 51.7, 67.6, 104.2 (m), 111.9 (m), 123.4, 123.7, 127.5 (dd, J=14.7, 8.7 Hz), 130.9, 132.7, 137.5, 138.0, 142.0, 158.8 (dd, J=246.1, 11.7 Hz) and 162.0 (dd, J=250.0, 13.7 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 381.12. Found, 380.7 (M).
    • Synthesis 50 N-(trans-4-Hydroxycyclohexyl)-2-methyl-4′-(trifluoromethoxy)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD742)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00242
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD702a and 4-trifluoromethoxyphenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.06-1.22 (4H, m), 1.70 (4H, m), 2.30 (3H, s), 2.94 (1H, br s), 3.31 (1H, br s), 4.51 (1H, d, J=4.3 Hz), 7.43 (3H, m), 7.53 (2H, d, J=8.5 Hz), 7.69 (2H, m) and 7.76 (1H, s). 13C NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 20.2, 31.1, 33.6, 51.7, 67.6, 120.9, 123.9, 128.0, 130.4, 130.9, 136.2, 139.1, 141.4, 143.4 and 147.9.
    • Synthesis 51 2′,4′-Dichloro-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)-3-(trifluoromethoxy)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD756)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00243
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD684a and 2,4-dichlorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a white powder. 1H NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.10 (2H, m), 1.27 (2H, m), 1.69 (4H, m), 3.08 (1H, br s), 3.32 (1H, br s), 4.52 (1H, d. J=4.3 Hz), 7.58 (3H, m), 7.62 (1H, d, J=8.2 Hz), 7.80 (1H, s), 7.93 (1H, br d) and 8.02 (1H, d, J=7.9 Hz).
    • Synthesis 52 Ethyl-cis-2-(2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)cyclopentane carboxylate (ABD769a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00244
  • Ethyl cis-2-aminocyclopentanecarboxylate hydrochloride (390 mg, 2.0 mmol) and 2′,4′-difluorobiphenylsulfonyl chloride (480 mg, 1.67 mmol) were stirred in DCM (5 mL) and pyridine (400 μL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, after which TLC indicated both starting materials were still present. DMAP (10 mg) and additional pyridine (1 mL) were added and stirring was continued for a further 24 hours, when TLC indicated no starting materials remained and a new compound had formed. The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and water (5 mL) and conc. HCl (1.5 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes. The layers were separated and the DCM was washed with water (2×5 mL), dried (hydrophobic membrane) and evaporated. The crude product was purified by chromatography on SiO2 (70 g Isolute II cartridge, SP4), eluting with 0-40% acetone/hexane to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (410 mg, 60%).
    • Synthesis 53 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(cis-2-(hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD769)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00245
  • A solution of ABD769a (100 mg, 0.24 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and LiAlH4 (1 M in THF, 1.22 mL, 1.22 mmol) was added by syringe. The ice bath was removed after 15 minutes and the solution was stirred overnight at room temperature. The mixture was then cooled back to 0° C. and dry THF (10 mL) was added, followed by Na2SO4.10H2O (˜1 g). The suspension was stirred for 1 hour at room temperature and then filtered. Evaporation of the solvents afforded a colourless glassy solid, which was triturated with ether and hexane at low temperature to give the title compound as a white powder (64 mg, 73%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.20-1.65 (6H, m), 1.89 (1H, br s), 3.15-3.25 (1H, m), 3.43-3.58 (2H, m), 7.21 (1H, t, J=8 Hz), 7.40 (1H, t, J=10 Hz), 7.64 (1H, q, J=8 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.86 (2H, d, J=8 Hz).
    • Synthesis 54 N-(cis-4-Aminocyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD812)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00246
  • N-(cis-4-(2,4-Dimethoxybenzylamino)cyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (see ABD787a) (52 mg, 0.10 mmol) was stirred in acetonitrile (3 mL) and water (1 mL) and ceric ammonium nitrate (144 mg, 0.26 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 50° C. overnight and then diluted with EtOAc (15 mL) and washed with water (2×5 mL). The washings were extracted with EtOAc (5 mL) and the combined organics were dried over MgSO4. After evaporation of the solvents, the residue was loaded onto a 1 g SCX column and eluted with MeOH and then 20% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM. The resulting material was further purified by chromatography (2 g Isolute II cartridge), eluting with 0-10% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM to afford the title compound as an off-white powder (9 mg, 25%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 0.86-0.98 (2H, m), 1.09-1.26 (2H, m), 1.55-1.68 (4H, m), 2.40 (1H, br s), 2.87 (1H, br s), 4.12 (1H, br s), 7.22 (1H, td, J=8 Hz, 2 Hz), 7.40 (1H, td, J=10 Hz, 2.5 Hz), 7.65 (1H, q, J=7 Hz), 7.71 (2H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.85 (2H, d, J=9 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=367.
    • Synthesis 55 (1S,3S)-Methyl 3-(2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4ylsulfonamido)cyclopentane carboxylate (ABD813a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00247
  • Using a method analogous to Method A, with methyl (1S,3S)-3-aminocyclopentanecarboxylate hydrochloride and 2′,4′-difluorobiphenylsulfonyl chloride, the title compound was obtained as a pale yellow solid (61%).
    • Synthesis 56 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-((1S,3S)-3-(hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD813)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00248
  • A solution of ABD813a (105 mg, 0.27 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and LiAlH4 (1 M in THF, 1.33 mL, 1.33 mmol) was added by syringe. After 5 minutes the ice bath was removed and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. After cooling back to 0° C., the reaction was quenched by adding Na2SO410.H2O (˜500 mg) cautiously. Once bubbling had stopped the mixture was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL) and stirred for 1 hour at room temperature before being filtered, rinsing the solids well with EtOAc. Evaporation of the solvent afforded the crude product as a colourless glassy solid which was purified by repeated chromatography on SiO2 (acetone/hexane) and finally trituration with Et2O, to give the title compound as a white powder (6 mg, 6%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.20-1.52 (3H, m), 1.60-1.73 (2H, m), 1.76-1.90 (2H, m), 2.24 (1H, quintet, J=7 Hz), 3.48 (2H, br s), 3.71 (1H, q, J=6 Hz), 4.56 (1H, d, J=7 Hz), 6.94-7.00 (2H, m), 7.43 (1H, q, J=7 Hz), 7.64 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.93 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=368.
    • Synthesis 57 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-((1S,3S)-3-(2-hydroxypropan-2yl)cyclopentyl) biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD815)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00249
  • A solution of ABD813a (105 mg, 0.27 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and MeMgBr (3 M in Et2O, 440 μL, 1.33 mmol) was added by syringe and the solution was stirred for 2 hours. TLC indicated some starting material remaining, and so further MeMgBr (3 M in Et2O, 440 μL, 1.33 mmol) was added and stirring continued at room temperature for a further 2 hours. The mixture was diluted with Et2O (30 mL) and quenched with NH4Cl (sat. aq., 10 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with further Et2O (10 mL) and the combined organics were washed with brine (10 mL) and dried over MgSO4. After evaporation of the solvent the crude product was purified by chromatography on SiO2 (20% acetone/hexane) to give the title compound as a colourless gum (77 mg, 72%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.12 (3H, s), 1.13 (3H, s), 1.45-1.75 (6H, m), 1.84-1.97 (1H, m), 2.07 (1H, t, J=8 Hz), 3.68 (1H, q, J=5 Hz), 4.60 (1H, d, J=7 Hz), 6.94-7.00 (2H, m), 7.42 (1H, td, J=8 Hz, 6 Hz), 7.64 (2H, dd, J=8 Hz, 2 Hz) and 7.93 (2H, d, J=8 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=396.
    • Synthesis 58 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(4-(methylamino)cyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD816)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00250
  • A solution of ABD786 (250 mg, 0.68 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was stirred under argon and methylamine (2 M in THF, 1.35 mL) was added by syringe. The solution was stirred for 1 hour and then STAB (360 mg, 1.7 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. TLC indicated starting material to still be present, and so further methylamine (2 M in THF, 1.35 mL) and STAB (360 mg, 1.7 mmol) and a drop of acetic acid were added and stirring was continued for a further 3 days. The reaction was quenched by the addition of 2 M NaOH (aq., 4 mL) and Et2O (20 mL) and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with Et2O (5 mL) and the combined organics were washed with water (2×5 mL) and dried over MgSO4. After evaporation of the solvents, the crude product was purified by catch-and-release on a 5 g SCX cartridge, eluting with MeOH and then 25% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM, to afford the crude amine. This was further purified by column chromatography (10 g Isolute II cartridge), eluting with 5%-10% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM and finally by trituration with ether and petrol to give the title compound as a white powder (˜1:1 mixture of stereoisomers) (93 mg, 36%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 0.80-1.80 (8H, m), 2.08 (0.5H, br s), 2.16 (3H, s), 2.30 (0.5H, br s), 2.90 (0.5H, br s), 3.03 (0.5H, br s), 4.84 (0.5H, br d, J=6 Hz), 7.21 (1H, t, J=8 Hz), 7.39 (1H, t, J=9 Hz), 7.64 (1H, q, J=7 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.86 (2H, d, J=9 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=381.
    • Synthesis 59 N-(4-(Ethylamino)cyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD817)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00251
  • A solution of ABD786 (250 mg, 0.68 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was stirred under argon and ethylamine (2 M in THF, 1.35 mL) was added by syringe. The solution was stirred for 1 hour and then STAB (360 mg, 1.7 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. TLC indicated starting material to still be present, and so further ethylamine (2 M in THF, 1.35 mL) and STAB (360 mg, 1.7 mmol) and a drop of acetic acid were added and stirring was continued for a further 3 days. The reaction was quenched by the addition of 2 M NaOH (aq., 4 mL) and Et2O (20 mL) and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with Et2O (5 mL) and the combined organics were washed with water (2×5 mL) and dried over MgSO4. After evaporation of the solvents, the crude product was purified by catch-and-release on a 5 g SCX cartridge, eluting with MeOH and then 25% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM, to afford the crude amine. This was further purified by column chromatography (10 g Isolute II cartridge), eluting with 5%-10% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM and finally by trituration with ether and petrol to give the title compound as a white powder (˜1:1 mixture of stereoisomers) (95 mg, 35%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 0.88-0.97 (3H, m), 1.08-1.63 (8H, m), 1.75 (1H, d, J=11 Hz), 2.19 (1H, br s), 2.42 (2H, q, J=7 Hz), 2.90 (0.5H, br s), 3.04 (0.5H, br s), 7.21 (1H, td, J=8 Hz, 2 Hz), 7.40 (1H, td, J=10 Hz, 2 Hz), 7.64 (1H, q, J=7 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=9 Hz), 7.85 (1H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.87 (1H, d, J=9 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=395.
    • Synthesis 60 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(4-(isopropylamino)cyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD818)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00252
  • ABD786 (450 mg, 1.23 mmol) was stirred in DCM (5 mL) and iPrNH2 (160 μL, 110 mg, 1.85 mmol) was added and the solution was stirred overnight at room temperature. It was then diluted with further DCM (5 mL) and STAB (1.30 g, 6.15 mmol) was added and stirring was continued for 2 hours. 2 M NaOH (aq., 7 mL) and EtOAc (30 mL) were added and the mixture was stirred for a further 30 minutes before the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with further EtOAc (10 mL) and the combined organics were washed with water (2×10 mL) and brine (10 mL) and dried over MgSO4. After evaporation of the solvents the crude product was split into two portions and each was purified by catch and release chromatography on a 2 g SCX cartridge, eluting with MeOH and then 10% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM, affording the desired material as a red-brown glassy solid. This was triturated with Et2O at 0° C. to give the title compound as an off-white powdery solid (200 mg, 40%, highly enriched (7:1) in one isomer). The trituration solvents were evaporated and the residue was purified by chromatography on SiO2 (10 g Isolute II cartridge), eluting with 10% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM to afford a pale yellow glassy solid, trituration of which with ether and hexane afforded a second crop of the title compound as an off-white powdery solid (78 mg, 15%, 4:6 mixture of isomers). 1H NMR (second crop) (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 0.86 (3H, d, J=7.5 Hz), 0.90 (3H, d, J=7.5 Hz), 1.15 (1H, q, J=15 Hz), 1.28-1.41 (4H, m), 1.47-1.55 (1H, m), 1.66 (1H, d, J=13 Hz), 1.70 (1H, d, J=15 Hz), 2.25-2.33 (0.6H, m), 2.51-2.55 (0.4H, m), 2.74 (1H, octet, J=7.5 Hz), 2.89 (0.4H, br s), 3.05 (0.6H, br s), 7.21 (1H, td, J=11 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.40 (1H, ddd, J=14 Hz, 11 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.63 (1H, t, J=10 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=9 Hz), 7.85 (1.2H, d, J=10 Hz) and 7.87 (0.8H, d, J=10 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=409.
    • Synthesis 61 N-(4-(Diethylamino)cyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD819)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00253
  • Prepared in an analogous fashion to ABD817, using diethylamine, to give the title compound as an off-white powder (˜1:1 mixture of stereoisomers) (168 mg, 58%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 0.84-0.89 (6H, m), 1.05-1.75 (8H, m), 2.35 (4H, q, J=7 Hz), 2.90 (0.5H, br s), 3.20 (0.5H, br s), 7.21 (1H, td, J=8 Hz, 2 Hz), 7.41 (1H, ddd, J=12 Hz, 9 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.60-7.65 (1H, m), 7.71 (2H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.84-7.89 (2H, m). LCMS: (MH)+=423.
    • Synthesis 62 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)cyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD820)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00254
  • Prepared in an analogous fashion to ABD817, using pyrrolidine, to give the title compound as an off-white powder (˜2:3 mixture of stereoisomers) (26 mg, 9%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.00-1.47 (6H, m), 1.60-1.65 (4H, m), 1.79-2.01 (3H, m), 2.48 (4H, br s), 2.93 (0.5H, br s), 3.07 (0.5H, br s), 7.21 (1H, td, J=8 Hz, 2 Hz), 7.40 (1H, ddd, J=12 Hz, 9 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.61-7.66 (1H, m), 7.70 (2H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.84-7.89 (2H, m). LCMS: (MH)+=421.
    • Synthesis 63 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(4-morpholinocyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD821)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00255
  • Prepared in an analogous fashion to ABD817, using morpholine, to give the title compound as an off-white powder (˜3:2 mixture of stereoisomers) (63 mg, 21%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.11 (2H, q, J=8 Hz), 1.25-1.42 (2H, m), 1.51-1.60 (2H, m), 1.67 (2H, d, J=9 Hz), 2.02 (1H, br s), 2.34-2.38 (4H, m), 2.90 (0.5H, br s), 3.15 (0.5H, br s), 3.45-3.52 (4H, m), 7.21 (1H, td, J=8 Hz, 2 Hz), 7.40 (1H, ddd, J=12 Hz, 9 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.64 (1H, q, J=8 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=9 Hz), 7.86 (1H, d, J=8 Hz) and 7.87 (1H, d, J=8 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=437; (M−H)−=435.
    • Synthesis 64 N-(4-(Ethyl(methyl)amino)cyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD822)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00256
  • Prepared in an analogous fashion to ABD817, using N-ethylmethylamine, to give the title compound as an off-white powder (˜7:3 mixture of stereoisomers) (73 mg, 26%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 0.88-0.91 (3H, m), 1.13-1.17 (2H, m), 1.29-1.36 (2H, m), 1.52-1.66 (4H, m), 2.06 (2H, s [Me of major isomer]), 2.13 (1H, s [Me of minor isomer]), 2.26 (1H, br s), 2.37 (2H, q, J=9 Hz), 2.89 (1H, br s), 3.18 (1H, br s), 7.21 (1H, t, J=10 Hz), 7.39 (1H, t, J=12 Hz), 7.63 (1H, q, J=8 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.82-7.89 (2H, m). LCMS: (MH)+=409.
    • Synthesis 65 cis-4-(2′,4′-Difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)cyclohexanecarboxylic acid (ABD824b)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00257
  • A mixture of (ABD781a) (1.06 g, 2.6 mmol), MeOH (5 mL), THF (5 mL) and water (5 mL) was stirred at room temperature and LiOH.H2O (550 mg, 13 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred overnight before the MeOH and THF were removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted to 40 mL with water and acidified with 2 M HCl (aq.). The resulting suspension was stirred vigorously for 1 hour and the off-white solid was then collected by suction and air-dried to give the title compound (920 mg, 89%).
    • Synthesis 66 cis-4-(2′,4′-Difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)-N-methylcyclohexane carboxamide (ABD824a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00258
  • A suspension of ABD824b (920 mg, 2.33 mmol) in dry DCM (15 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and (COCl)2 (245 μL, 325 mg, 2.56 mmol) was added, followed by DMF (30 μL, catalytic). The ice bath was removed and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours, giving a pale yellow solution. A solution of methylamine (2 M in THF, 5.8 mL, 11.6 mmol) in dry DCM (15 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and the solution of the acid chloride was added by cannula, resulting in the formation of a precipitate. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour, allowing it to warm to room temperature, and then diluted with further DCM (30 mL) and washed with water (2×10 mL) and brine (10 mL). The organic solvents were dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (890 mg, 94%), which required no further purification. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.48-1.78 (8H, m), 2.05-2.15 (1H, m), 2.78 (3H, d, J=5 Hz), 3.48-3.57 (1H, m), 4.97 (1H, br s), 5.49 (1H, br s), 6.87-7.05 (2H, m), 7.40 (1H, q, J=5 Hz), 7.64 (2H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.94 (2H, d, J=9 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=409; (M−H)−=407.
    • Synthesis 67 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(cis-4-((methylamino)methyl)cyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD824)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00259
  • A solution of ABD824a (240 mg, 0.59 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) was cooled to 0° C. under argon and BH3 (1 M in THF, 1.8 mL, 1.8 mmol) was added by syringe. The solution was stirred overnight, allowing it to warm to room temperature, after which TLC indicated that starting material was still present, as well as a more polar compound. Further BH3 (1 M in THF, 1.0 mL, 1.0 mmol) was added and the solution was heated at reflux for 3 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction was quenched with NH4Cl (sat. aq., 5 mL) and water was added to dissolve the solids. The mixture was extracted with Et2O (3×15 mL) and the organics were dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to afford the crude product as a colourless glass. This was purified by SCX catch-and-release chromatography, eluting with MeOH and then 10% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM, and finally by trituration with Et2O to give the title compound as a white powder (81 mg, 35%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.20-1.53 (8H, m), 2.22 (3H, s), 2.31 (2H, d, J=7 Hz), 3.17 (2H, br s), 7.21 (1H, td, J=11 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.40 (1H, ddd, J=14 Hz, 11 Hz, 3 Hz), 7.64 (1H, td, J=11 Hz, 8 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.87 (2H, d, J=10 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=395.
    • Synthesis 68 cis-4-(2′,4′-Difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)-N,N-dimethyl cyclohexanecarboxamide (ABD826a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00260
  • A suspension of ABD824b (850 mg, 2.15 mmol) in dry DCM (15 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and (COCl)2 (225 μL, 300 mg, 2.4 mmol) was added, followed by DMF (30 μL, catalytic). The ice bath was removed and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, giving a pale yellow solution. Half of the solution of the acid chloride was cooled to 0° C. under argon and dimethylamine (2 M in THF, 2.5 mL, 5 mmol) was added by syringe. The mixture was stirred overnight, allowing it to warm to room temperature. It was then diluted with further DCM (20 mL) and washed with water (3×5 mL) and brine (5 mL). The organic solvents were dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to afford the crude product as an off-white solid. This was purified by chromatography on SiO2 (20 g Isolute II cartridge), eluting with 50% acetone/hexane, to give the title compound as a white solid (395 mg, 87%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.45-1.62 (4H, m), 1.65-1.82 (4H, m), 2.48-2.59 (1H, m), 2.99 (3H, s), 3.00 (3H, s), 3.55-3.63 (1H, m), 5.17 (1H, d, J=8 Hz), 6.87-7.03 (2H, m), 7.42 (1H, q, J=5 Hz), 7.61 (2H, d, J=9 Hz) and 7.95 (2H, d, J=9 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=423; (M−H)−=421.
    • Synthesis 69 N-(cis-4-((Dimethylamino)methyl)cyclohexyl)-2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD826)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00261
  • A solution of ABD826a (200 mg, 0.47 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was cooled under argon to 0° C. and LiAlH4 (1 M in THF, 2.36 mL, 2.36 mmol) was added dropwise by syringe over 2 minutes. Once gas evolution ceased, the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 1 hour. The solution was then cooled back to 0° C. and quenched with Na2SO4.10H2O (s, ˜500 mg) and allowed to stir overnight. The mixture was filtered, rinsing the solid well with additional THF. After evaporation of the solvents the crude product was purified by trituration with Et2O/hexane, to give the title compound as a white powder (95 mg, 49%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.18-1.47 (8H, m), 1.97 (2H, d, J=9 Hz), 2.03 (6H, s), 3.18 (2H, br s), 4.34 (1H, br s), 7.21 (1H, t, J=9 Hz), 7.39 (1H, t, J=11 Hz), 7.58-7.67 (2H, m), 7.70 (2H, d, J=10 Hz) and 7.87 (2H, d, J=10 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=409.
    • Synthesis 70 4-(N-(trans-4-Hydroxycyclohexyl)sulfamoyl)phenylboronic acid (ABD836a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00262
  • ABD598 (500 mg, 1.5 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (420 mg, 1.65 mmol), KOAc (294 mg, 3 mmol) and Pd(dppf)Cl2 (55 mg, 0.08 mmol) were combined in DMSO (10 mL) and placed in an ultrasonic bath under a stream of argon for 5 minutes. The flask was then placed in an oil bath at 90° C. and stirred for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was then cooled to room temperature and poured into water (40 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3×20 mL). The combined organics were washed with water (20 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and filtered. Evaporation gave a brown solid (555 mg), containing both the boronic acid and the ester, which was used without further purification.
    • Synthesis 71 4-(3,5-Dichloropyridin-2-yl)-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)benzene sulfonamide (ABD836)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00263
  • ABD836a (278 mg, 0.92 mmol) was dissolved in DME (4 mL) and 2-bromo-3,5-dichloropyridine (171 mg, 0.76 mmol), Pd(dppf)Cl2 (23 mg, 5 mol %) and Na2CO3 (2 M soln, 1.15 mL, 2.30 mmol) were added. The mixture was placed in an ultrasonic bath under a stream of argon for 5 minutes. It was then placed in a preheated oil bath (90° C.) for 1.75 hours. After this time, the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and poured into water (80 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3×60 mL). The combined organics were washed with water (50 mL) and brine (50 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and evaporated onto silica. The crude material was purified by flash column chromatography on SiO2, eluting with 2:1 EtOAc/hexane. Evaporation of the desired fractions and re-crystallisation (DCM-hexane) gave the title compound as colourless needles (21 mg, 7%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.20-1.34 (4H, m), 1.38 (1H, d, J=4 Hz), 1.91 (4H, d, J=8 Hz), 3.18 (1H, br s), 3.56 (1H, br s), 4.46 (1H, d, J=7.5 Hz), 7.85 (2H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.97 (3H, s overlapped with d, J=8 Hz) and 8.58 (1H, d, J=2 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=401.
    • Synthesis 72 4-(5-Chloropyrimidin-2-yl)-N-(trans-4-hydroxycyclohexyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD837)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00264
  • A solution ABD836a (278 mg, 0.92 mmol) in DME (4 mL) was stirred and 2,5-dichloropyrimidine (112 mg, 0.76 mmol), Pd(dppf)Cl2 (23 mg, 5 mol %) and Na2CO3 (2 M soln, 1.15 mL, 2.30 mmol) were added. The mixture was placed in an ultrasonic bath under a stream of argon for 5 minutes. It was then placed in a preheated oil bath (90° C.) for 1 hour. After this time, the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and poured into water (80 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3×60 mL). The combined organics were washed with water (50 mL), brine (50 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and absorbed onto silica. The crude material was purified by flash column chromatography, eluting with 1:1 v/v acetone-hexane. Evaporation of the desired fractions and washing the solid with diethyl ether gave the title compound (55 mg, 20%) as an off-white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.08 (4H, septet, J=11 Hz), 1.55 (2H, d, J=11 Hz), 1.66 (2H, d, J=11 Hz), 2.90 (1H, t, J=9 Hz), 3.20-3.28 (1H, br m), 4.45 (1H, br s), 7.74 (1H, br s), 7.93 (2H, d, J=8 Hz), 8.48 (2H, d, J=8 Hz) and 9.04 (2H, s). LCMS: (MH)+=368.
    • Synthesis 73 N-(trans-4-Hydroxycyclohexyl)-4-(pyrimidin-5-yl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD861)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00265
  • A solution of ABD836a (225 mg, 0.78 mmol) in DME (4 mL) was stirred at room temperature and 5-bromopyrimidine (99 mg, 0.63 mmol), Pd(dppf)Cl2 (23 mg, 0.03 mmol) and Na2CO3 (2 M aq., 0.95 mL) were added. The mixture was placed in an ultrasonic bath under a stream of argon for 5 minutes and then in an oil bath that had been pre-heated to 90° C. The reaction mixture was heated for 1 hour and then cooled to room temperature, diluted with water (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3×10 mL). The extracts were washed with water (5 mL) and brine (5 mL) and dried over MgSO4. After evaporation of the solvents the residue was purified by column chromatography on SiO2 (50% acetone/hexane) to afford a mixture of the desired material and a dimeric species produced during boronic acid formation. The partially purified material was triturated with Et2O (2×2 mL) and then purified by a second SiO2 column, this time eluting with 5% 10% 2 M NH3/MeOH in DCM, to give the title compound as an off-white solid (65 mg, 31%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.10 (4H, septet, J=7 Hz), 1.55-1.73 (4H, m), 2.85-2.95 (1H, m), 3.20-3.30 (1H, m), 4.47 (1H, d, J=3 Hz), 7.73 (1H, d, J=6 Hz), 7.90 (2H, d, J=8.5 Hz), 8.01 (2H, d, J=8.5 Hz), 9.19 (2H, s) and 9.21 (1H, s). LCMS: (MH)+=334.
    • Synthesis 74 N-(4-(2′,4′-Difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)cyclohexyl)-2,2,2-trifluoroacetamide (ABD864a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00266
  • A solution of ABD787 (410 mg, 1.12 mmol) in dry THF (10 ml) was stirred at room temperature and triethylamine (350 μL, 250 mg, 2.5 mmol) and TFAA (200 μL, 300 mg, 1.44 mmol) were added, causing the solution to turn deep red and get warm. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours and then poured into water (10 mL) and EtOAc (20 mL) and the layers were separated. The organic phase was washed with water (10 mL) and sat. NaHCO3 (aq., 10 mL) and dried over MgSO4. After evaporation of the solvents, the crude product was purified by column chromatography on SiO2 (1:1 acetone/hexane) to give the title compound as a waxy orange solid (370 mg, 71%).
    • Synthesis 75 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(cis-4-(2,2,2-trifluoroethylamino)cyclohexyl) biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD864)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00267
  • A solution of N-(4-(2′,4′-difluorobiphenyl-4-ylsulfonamido)cyclohexyl)-2,2,2-trifluoroacetamide (350 mg, 0.76 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was stirred under argon at room temperature and BH3/THF (1 M, 3.8 mL) was added. The mixture was heated to 50° C. and stirred for 4 hours, after which LCMS analysis indicated the reaction to be proceeding, but significant starting material was present. Further BH3/THF (1 M, 2.5 mL) was added and the mixture was heated at 50° C. overnight. The mixture was then cooled and NH4Cl (sat. aq., 10 mL) was added cautiously, followed by water to dissolve all the solids. The mixture was then extracted with EtOAc (3×20 mL) and the combined extracts were dried over MgSO4. After evaporation of the solvents, the crude material was purified by column chromatography on SiO2 (30% acetone/hexane) affording a viscous pale yellow oil (270 mg, 79%), which LCMS indicated to be only 78% pure and a mixture of diastereomers.
  • The mixture of diastereomers was dissolved in HPLC grade MeOH (5 mL) and purified by reverse-phase preparative HPLC, eluting with 50%-80% acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% NH4OH (aq.), to give baseline separation of the two peaks. The fractions corresponding to the first peak were combined and the acetonitrile was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was extracted with DCM (30 mL, 2×15 mL) and the combined extracts were dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of the solvents gave the title cis-isomer as a pale yellow solid (66 mg, 24%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.07-1.30 (5H, m), 1.86-1.95 (4H, m), 2.46-2.54 (1H, m), 3.17 (2H, q, J=9.5 Hz), 3.22-3.11 (1H, m), 4.49 (1H, d, J=7.5 Hz), 6.91-7.03 (2H, m), 7.43 (1H, td, J=8.5 Hz, 6 Hz), 7.64 (2H, dd, J=8.5 Hz, 1.5 Hz) and 7.93 (2H, d, J=8.5 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=449.
    • Synthesis 76 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(trans-4-(2,2,2-trifluoroethylamino)cyclohexyl) biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD865)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00268
  • Continuing from the separation as described for ABD864: the fractions corresponding to the second peak were combined and the acetonitrile was removed under reduced pressure, the residue was extracted with DCM (30 mL, 2×15 mL) and the combined extracts were dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of the solvents gave the title trans-isomer as a pale yellow solid (48 mg, 24%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.39-1.71 (8H, m), 2.68 (1H, br s), 3.13 (2H, q, J=9.5 Hz), 3.38 (1H, br s), 4.92 (1H, d, J=7 Hz), 6.90-7.04 (2H, m), 7.43 (1H, td, J=8.5 Hz, 6.5 Hz), 7.63 (2H, dd, J=8.5 Hz, 2 Hz) and 7.95 (2H, d, J=8.5 Hz). LCMS: (MH)+=449.
    • Synthesis 77 tert-Butyl-4-hydroxycyclohexylcarbamate
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00269
  • trans-4-Aminocyclohexanol hydrochloride (13.5 g) was suspended in dry DCM (100 mL) and cooled to 5-10° C. To this, BOC anhydride (24.6 mL, 23.32 g, 106.8 mmol) was added drop-wise over 15 minutes. The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen for 15 minutes. Triethylamine (37.2 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred overnight, allowing the temperature to rise to room temperature. The solution was diluted with water (100 mL) and extracted with DCM (2×50 mL), organic layer dried over Na2SO4. Evaporation of the solvents gave the title compound as a colorless solid (17.1 g, quantitative).
    • Synthesis 78 tert-Butyl 4-oxocyclohexylcarbamate
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00270
  • tert-Butyl-4-hydroxycyclohexylcarbamate (17 g) and Celite (17 g) were suspended in dry DCM (100 mL). PCC (25.5 g) was added portion-wise within 10-15 minutes. The reaction was stirred under nitrogen for 2.5 hours. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was re-dissolved in EtOAc/n-hexane (1000 mL) and filtered through celite. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4. Evaporation of the solvents gave the title compound as a colorless solid (16.1 g, quantitative).
    • Synthesis 79 tert-Butyl cis-4-hydroxy-4-methylcyclohexylcarbamate and tert-butyl trans-4-hydroxy-4-methylcyclohexylcarbamate
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00271
  • A solution of methylmagnesium chloride (3 M in THF, 71.4 mL) was added to a solution of tert-butyl 4-oxocyclohexylcarbamate (16 g, 75.01 mmol) in THF at −75° C. The mixture was stirred overnight, allowing the temperature to rise to room temperature. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride solution and the volatile solvent removed under reduced pressure. The residue was taken up in water (50 mL) and DCM (100 mL) and solid citric acid were added until the layers separated. The organic phase was washed with brine and dried (Na2SO4). Evaporation of the solvents gave a crude sticky mass which was purified by column chromatography and the trans isomer isolated as a colorless solid (660 mg) and the cis isomer as a colourless solid (1.0 g).
    • Synthesis 80 trans-4-Amino-1-methyl-cyclohexanol and cis-4-amino-1-methyl-cyclohexanol
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00272
  • To the Boc-protected amines from Synthesis 79 was added ethanolic HCl (20 mL) at 0° C. The solution was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated to give the trans isomer as a light yellow oil (400 mg) and the cis isomer (800 mg) as a light yellow oil.
    • Synthesis 81 4-Bromo-N-(cis-4-hydroxy-4-methylcyclohexyl)benzenesulfonamide (ABD899a)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00273
  • A suspension of cis-4-amino-1-methyl cyclohexanol (0.6 g) and 4-bromobenzenesulfonyl chloride (1.78 g) in chloroform (20 mL) was stirred under nitrogen at 0° C. Triethylamine (3.2 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 16 hours, allowing the temperature to rise to room temperature. The solution was diluted with EtOAc (50 mL) and washed with water (2×20 mL), 1 M HCl (20 mL) and brine (20 mL) and dried over Na2SO4. Evaporation of the solvents gave a light yellow solid, which was triturated with n-pentane and ether to give the title compound as a white solid (1.2 g, 75%).
    • Synthesis 82 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(cis-4-hydroxy-4-methylcyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD899)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00274
  • Using a method analogous to Method B, with ABD899a and 2′,4′-difluorophenylboronic acid, the title compound was obtained as a clear oil. Trituration with n-pentane and ether gave a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.23 (1H, s), 1.25 (3H, s), 1.44-1.51 (4H, m), 1.65 (2H, m), 1.85 (2H, m), 3.35 (1H, m), 4.59 (1H, d, J=6.6 Hz), 6.91-7.03 (2H, m), 7.44 (1H, m), 7.63 (2H, dd, J=8.5 Hz, 2 Hz) and 7.94 (2H, dd, J=8.7 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 381.12. Found, 380.4 (M).
    • Synthesis 83 2′,4′-Difluoro-N-(trans-4-hydroxy-4-methylcyclohexyl)biphenyl-4-sulfonamide (ABD900)
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00275
  • A suspension of trans-4-amino-1-methyl-cyclohexanol (0.3 g) and 2′,4′-difluorobiphenylsulfonyl chloride (0.8 g) in chloroform (20 mL) were stirred under nitrogen at 0° C. Triethylamine (1.60 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 16 hours, allowing the temperature to rise to room temperature. The solution was diluted with EtOAc (50 mL) and washed with water (2×20 mL), 1 M HCl (20 mL) and brine (20 mL) and dried over Na2SO4. Evaporation of the solvents gave a dark brown solid which was purified by column chromatography followed by trituration with n-pentane and ether to give the title compound as a buff sticky solid (80 mg, 10% yield). Melting point: 105°-107° C. MS, m/z: Calcd, 381.12. Found, 380.5 (M). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 0.98 (1H, s), 1.20 (3H, s), 1.40 (2H, m), 1.60 (5H, m), 3.18 (1H, m), 4.38 (1H, d, J=7.8 Hz), 6.91-7.03 (2H, m), 7.44 (1H, m), 7.63 (2H, dd, J=8.5 Hz, 2 Hz) and 7.94 (2H, dd, J=8.7 Hz). MS, m/z: Calcd, 381.12. Found, 380.5 (M).
    • Biological Methods
  • Initial screening of candidate compounds was performed using in vitro assays to determine potency, metabolic stability and solubility in biologically relevant fluids. Potency was assessed using a viability assay based on the survival of the J774 macrophage cell line. Macrophages are closely related to osteoclasts and have been used previously as a model system for osteoclast survival (see, e.g., Luckman et al., 1998). Like osteoclasts, J774 macrophages are dependent on continued NFκB activation for survival, thereby providing a valuable screen for compounds with anti-inflammatory activity. Metabolic stability was measured by determining the rate of disappearance of compound in the presence of human liver microsomal preparations, as quantified by LC-MS/MS. Solubility was measured by equilibration of the compound in fasted state simulated intestinal fluid (FaSSIF) and quantified by HPLC.
    • Alamar Blue Macrophage J774 Viability Assay
  • In vitro potency as anti-inflammatory agents was determined for a number of APSAC compounds by incubation with J774 macrophages and subsequent determination of cell viability.
  • J774 cells were plated at 104 cells per well in 100 μL αMEM (α Modified Eagle Medium) in 96-well plates and grown overnight. The next day, test compounds were added to the cultures, and cultures were continued for another 72 hours. At the end of the culture period, cell survival was determined using an Alamar Blue assay as previously described (see, e.g., Nociari et al., 1998).
  • Alamar Blue is an oxidation-reduction sensitive indicator. The dye itself is in the oxidised state, which is blue and non-fluorescent. The dye can accept electrons from reducing species, such as NADPH and FADH, to form a reduced dye species, which is red and fluorescent. Thus the transformation from oxidised form to reduced form can be measured by fluorimetric or colourimetric means. For fluorescence measurements, 530-560 nm excitation and 590 nm emission wavelengths are typically used. For colourimetric measurements, absorbance at 570 nm (reduced form) and 600 nm (oxidised form) is typically measured. A simple calculation is performed to determine the relative quantities of the two species.
  • A high ratio of the reducing species, NADPH and FADH, to the corresponding oxidised species, NADP and FAD, is an indicator that cells are proliferating and viable. A low ratio indicates cells that are quiescent or non-viable.
  • Briefly, Alamar Blue (Biosource International) was added undiluted to the each well (1:10 v/v, 10 μL). The plate was incubated at 37° C. for 3-4 hours and the fluorescence was measured at 590 nm, with a 25 nm bandwidth. A high reading indicated cells with normal viability, and a low reading indicated cells that have been damaged and are no longer proliferating normally. The controls gave a high fluorescence reading, indicating a high number of live, healthy cells. A potent test compound gave a low fluorescence reading. The average results for each test compound (n=5) were expressed as a percent (%) of the average control value.
  • Addition of Compounds. All of the compounds studied were made up as 100 mM solutions in DMSO. These stock solutions were then diluted 1000-10000× in culture medium (αMEM). From these 100 μM or 10 μM solutions, convenient quantities (3-33 μL) were added directly to the wells so as to give the desired final compound concentration.
  • This assay offers numerous advantages over other assays, including MTT assays: it permits a higher throughput; it is more sensitive; it is non-damaging to the cells; it is faster; and it generally gives an identical result to MTT assays.
    • Aqueous Solubility Measurements
  • Thermodynamic aqueous solubility was measured by equilibration of a number of APSAC compounds, in the solid state, with fasted state simulated intestinal fluid (FaSSIF) and quantified by HPLC. Measurement of solubility in FaSSIF provides a valuable model for the prediction of drug dissolution following oral administration.
  • FaSSIF was prepared as described below:
  • Preparation of Blank FaSSIF:
  • NaOH pellets (174 mg), NaH2PO4.2H2O (2.235 g), and NaCl (3.093 g) were dissolved in 500 mL of water. The pH was adjusted to 6.5 using 1 M NaOH solution.
  • Preparation of FaSSIF:
  • Sodium taurocholate (165 mg) was dissolved in 25 mL blank FaSSIF. 0.6 mL of a solution containing 100 mg/mL lecithin in methylene chloride was added. The methylene chloride was eliminated under vacuum at about 40° C. The vacuum was drawn for 15 minutes at 250 mbar, followed by 15 minutes at 100 mbar. This resulted in a clear, micellar solution, having no perceptible odour of methylene chloride. After cooling to room temperature, the solution was then adjusted to 100 mL with blank FaSSIF.
  • Aqueous solubility was determined by suspending separately sufficient compound in FaSSIF to give a maximum final concentration of ≧10 mg/mL of the parent free-form of the compound. The suspension was equilibrated at 25° C. for 24 hours, and then the pH was measured. The suspension was then filtered through a glass fibre C filter into a 96-well plate. The filtrate was then diluted by a factor of 100. Quantification was made by HPLC with reference to a standard solution of compound at approximately 0.1 mg/mL in DMSO. Different volumes of the standard, diluted and undiluted sample solutions were injected. The solubility was calculated using the peak areas determined by integration of the peak found at the same retention time as the principal peak in the standard injection. Detection conditions are shown in the table below. Analysis was performed on an Agilent HP1100 series system equipped with a diode array detector and using ChemStation software vB.02.01-SR1.
  • TABLE 1
    HPLC Method Parameters for Solubility Measurements
    Type of method: Reverse phase with gradient elution
    Column: Phenomenex Luna, C18 (2)
    5 μm 50 × 4.6 mm
    Column Temperature (° C.): 25
    Standard Injections (μL): 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10
    Test Injections (μL): 1, 2, 3, 10, 20, 50
    Detection: Wavelength, 260, 80
    Bandwidth (nm):
    Flow Rate (mL/min): 2
    Phase A: 0.1% TFA in water
    Phase B: 0.085% TFA in acetonitrile
    Time % Phase
    (min) A % Phase B
    Timetable: 0.0 95 5
    1.0 80 20
    2.3 5 95
    3.3 5 95
    3.5 95 5
    4.4 95 5
    • Human Liver Microsomal Stability Assay
  • Metabolic stability of APSAC derivatives was measured by determination of the rate of compound disappearance when incubated in the presence of human liver microsomes. Liver microsomes are prepared from the endoplasmic reticulum of hepatocytes and are the primary source of the most important enzymes (cytochrome P450) involved in drug metabolism. Study of drug stability in the presence of liver microsomes is accepted as a valuable model permitting rapid prediction of in vivo drug stability.
    • Protocol Summary:
  • Human liver microsomes were obtained from a commercial source. Test compounds (3 μM) were incubated with pooled liver microsomes (male and female). Samples were incubated for a 45 minute period and removed at 5 time points and test compounds were analysed by LC-MS/MS.
  • Microsomes (final protein concentration 0.5 mg/mL), 0.1 M phosphate buffer pH 7.4, and test compound (final concentration 3 μM; diluted from 10 mM stock solution to give a final DMSO concentration of 0.25%) were incubated at 37° C. prior to the addition of NADPH (final concentration 1 mM) to initiate the reaction. The final incubation volume was 25 μL. A control incubation was included for each compound tested, where 0.1 M phosphate buffer pH 7.4 was added instead of NADPH. The control compounds testosterone and 7-hydroxycoumarin were included in each experiment and all incubations were performed singularly for each compound.
  • Each compound was incubated for 0, 5, 15, 30, and 45 minutes. The control (minus NADPH) was incubated for 45 minutes only. The reactions were stopped by the addition of 50 μL methanol containing internal standard at the appropriate time points. The incubation plates were centrifuged at 2500 rpm for 20 minutes at 4° C. to precipitate the protein.
    • Quantitative Analysis:
  • Following protein precipitation, the sample supernatants were combined in cassettes of up to 4 compounds and analysed using standard LC-MS/MS conditions.
    • Data Analysis:
  • From a plot of the natural logarithm of the peak area ratio (i.e., the ratio of compound peak area:internal standard peak area) against time, the gradient of the line was determined. Subsequently, half-life and intrinsic clearance were calculated using the equations below:

  • Eliminated rate constant(k)=(−gradient).

  • Half life(t 1/2) (min)=0.063/k.

  • Intrinsic Clearance(CLint) (μL/min/million cells)=(V×0.693)/t 1/2.
      • wherein V=Incubation volume (μL/mg microsomal protein).
    Pharmacokinetics Studies
  • Absorption and metabolic stability were studied using an in vivo pharmacokinetics assay. Drug levels were assessed using ultra-performance LC/TOF-MS.
  • Three male Sprague-Dawley rats, 200-300 g, were dosed per route. Test compound was administered either orally or intravenously (dose level of 1 mg/kg body weight). Test compound was formulated in 50:50 tetraethylene glycol:PBS for both routes. Animals were given free access to food throughout the study. On the day prior to dosing, the carotid artery was cannulated for sample collection and for the intravenous study the jugular vein was cannulated to enable dosing.
  • Blood samples were taken from the carotid artery at the following time points and placed in heparinised tubes:
  • Oral dosing—predose, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8 and 24 hours post dose.
  • IV dosing—predose, 0.08, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4 and 8 hours post dose.
  • After the final time point, the animals were sacrificed by an overdose of anaesthetic.
  • Blood samples were centrifuged to obtain plasma, which was transferred to a separate container and frozen at −20° C.
    • Sample Preparation:
  • Samples were thawed at room temperature and prepared by protein precipitation with acetonitrile in the ratio 1:2 with plasma, followed by centrifugation for 10 minutes at 16,100×g (Eppendorf 5415D, Eppendorf AG, Hamburg, Germany). The supernatants were collected for analysis. The standard samples were prepared similarly, after spiking blank rat plasma samples to study compound concentrations at 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 and 1000 ng/mL. In addition, extra samples were prepared from 0-1 hour i.v. samples by diluting 1/20 with 50% aqueous acetonitrile to avoid exceeding the linear range of the analytical method.
    • Analytical Methods:
  • A Waters Acquity liquid ultra-performance chromatographic system (Waters Corp., Milford, Mass., USA) with autosampler, vacuum degasser and column oven was used. The analytical column used for all compounds was a Waters BEH C18, (2.1×50 mm, 1.7 μm, Waters Corp, Milford, Mass., USA) together with a 0.2 μm on-line filter before the column. The eluents were 0.1% acetic acid (A, pH 3.2) and methanol (B). Gradient elution from 5% to 60% B in two minutes was employed, followed by one minute gradient to 90% B and column equilibration. The flow rate was 0.5 mL/min and the column oven temperature was 35° C. The flow was directed to the MS via Water Acquity photo-diode-array (PDA) detector. LC/TOF-MS data were recorded with a Micromass LCT Premier XE time-of-flight (TOF) mass spectrometer (Micromass Ltd., Manchester, England) equipped with a LockSpray electrospray ionization source. A positive ionization mode of electrospray was used for all compounds. The mass range of m/z 100-900 was acquired. The W-option of the reflector was used, and the DRE (dynamic range enhancement) option was set to on. The mass spectrometer and HPLC system were operated under Micromass MassLynx 4.1 software. Leucine enkephalin ([M+H]+ m/z 556.2771) was used as a lock mass compound for accurate mass measurements and was delivered into the LockSpray probe with a syringe pump. Masslynx 4.1 software was used for controlling the instrumentation and for data processing.
    • Calculations:
  • The pharmacokinetic parameters for the test compounds were calculated by WinNonlin Pro (Pharsight Corp, CA) using standard noncompartmental methods. The elimination phase half-life (t1/2) was calculated by least-squares regression analysis of the terminal linear part of the log concentration-time curve. The area under the plasma concentration-time curve (AUC) was determined by use of the linear trapezoidal rule up to the last measurable concentration and thereafter by extrapolation of the terminal elimination phase to infinity. The tentative oral bioavailability (F) was calculated by dividing the AUC (0-24 hours) after p.o. administration by the AUC (0-8 hours) after i.v. administration, i.e., F=AUC (p.o.)/AUC (i.v), and reported as percentages (%).
    • Caspase Induction Study
  • The ability to activate caspase 3 was studied using a fluorogenic enzyme substrate assay.
  • Briefly, human primary monocytes were isolated from whole blood using Ficoll gradients. The resulting cells were plated into microwell plates for 24 hours after which non-adherent cells were removed by washing. Cells were differentiated in the presence of 100 ng/mL MCSF. Cells were pre-treated with 10 μM test compound for 1 hour prior to stimulation with 10 ng/mL TNFα. Caspase 3 activation as an indicator of apoptosis was detected using the Nucview488 stain, which was added one hour prior to visualisation. The Nucview488 stain indicates the activation of caspase 3 (CPP32, apopain, YAMA), a cysteine peptidase which plays a key role in the induction of apoptosis in individual whole mammalian cells. Essentially, Nucview488 consists of a fluorogenic DNA dye and a DEVD substrate moiety specific for caspase 3. In itself, Nucview488 is nonfluorescent. However, upon entering the cell cytoplasm, Nucview488 is cleaved by caspase 3 to form a high-affinity DNA dye. The released DNA dye migrates to the cell nucleus to stain the nucleus bright green. This fluorescent staining produced in response to caspase 3 activity is monitored using fluorescent light microscopy.
    • Biological Data Biological Study 1
  • The biological activity of a number of APSAC compounds was determined and compared with the biological activity of a range of structurally related compounds using the assays described previously.
  • IC50 values were determined for several APSAC compounds, as well as several reference compounds, using the Alamar Blue macrophage J774 viability assay described above. The results are summarised in the following tables.
  • TABLE 2A
    Alamar Blue Macrophage J774 Viability Assay Data
    (Reference Compounds)
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00276
    Compound —RX2 —RX4 —QRef IC50 (μM)
    ABD455 —Cl —Cl
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00277
         		0.50
    ABD456 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00278
         		0.25
    ABD466 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00279
         		3.0
    ABD575 —F —Cl
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00280
         		0.40
  • TABLE 2B
    Alamar Blue Macrophage J774 Viability Assay Data
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00281
    Compound —RX2 —RX4 —DQ IC50 (μM)
    ABD599 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00282
         		0.07
    ABD777 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00283
         		1.9
    ABD769 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00284
         		4.59
    ABD770 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00285
         		—
    ABD771 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00286
         		—
    ABD772 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00287
         		—
    ABD773 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00288
         		0.13
    ABD774 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00289
         		—
    ABD775 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00290
         		—
    ABD796 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00291
         		<0.3
    ABD813 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00292
         		0.57
    ABD815 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00293
         		<0.3
    ABD776 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00294
         		0.8
    ABD781 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00295
         		0.3
    ABD786 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00296
         		0.28
    ABD787 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00297
         		3.55
    ABD794 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00298
         		2.1
    ABD795 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00299
         		2.7
    ABD798 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00300
         		0.6
    ABD799 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00301
         		0.4
    ABD812 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00302
         		7.6
    ABD816 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00303
         		0.8
    ABD817 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00304
         		<1
    ABD819 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00305
         		2.4
    ABD820 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00306
         		2.5
    ABD821 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00307
         		>10
    ABD822 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00308
         		6.98
    ABD824 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00309
         		7.2
    ABD826 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00310
         		1.0
    ABD864 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00311
         		>10
    ABD865 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00312
         		5.9
  • TABLE 2C
    Alamar Blue Macrophage J774 Viability Assay Data
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00313
    Compound —Ar IC50 (μM)
    ABD599
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00314
         		0.07
    ABD655
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00315
         		0.18
    ABD665
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00316
         		4.9
    ABD705
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00317
         		0.83
    ABD710
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00318
         		1.98
    ABD712
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00319
         		5.46
    ABD732
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00320
         		4.32
    ABD735
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00321
         		0.09
    ABD742
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00322
         		0.77
    ABD756
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00323
         		2.18
    ABD836
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00324
         		0.28
    ABD837
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00325
         		8.88
    ABD861
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00326
         		Inactive
  • These data demonstrate that it is possible to replace the phenylene group of -QRef with a saturated carbocyclic structure without a loss of potency. These data also demonstrate that it is possible to make a range of substitutions on the biaryl system and retain potency. The data also demonstrate that these replacements and substitutions are neither trivial nor predictable and can lead either to an increase or a decrease in potency.
    • Biological Study 2
  • The metabolic stability of a number of APSAC compounds was determined and compared with the metabolic stability of a range of structurally related compounds using the assays described previously.
  • Biological half-life values (t1/2) were determined for several APSAC compounds, as well as several reference compounds, using the human liver microsomal stability assay described above. The results are summarised in the following tables.
  • TABLE 3A
    Human Liver Microsomal Stability Data
    (Reference Compounds)
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00327
    Compound —RX2 —RX4 —QRef T1/2 (min)
    ABD455 —Cl —Cl
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00328
         		28
    ABD456 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00329
         		30
    ABD466 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00330
         		 2
    ABD575 —F —Cl
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00331
         		42
  • TABLE 3B
    Human Liver Microsomal Stability Data
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00332
    Compound —RX2 —RX4 —DQ T1/2 (min)
    ABD599 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00333
         		287
    ABD655 —F —Cl
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00334
         		228
    ABD777 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00335
         		69
    ABD769 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00336
         		42
    ABD770 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00337
         		—
    ABD771 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00338
         		—
    ABD772 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00339
         		—
    ABD773 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00340
         		54
    ABD774 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00341
         		—
    ABD775 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00342
         		—
    ABD796 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00343
         		54
    ABD813 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00344
         		45.4
    ABD815 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00345
         		13.2
    ABD776 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00346
         		137
    ABD781 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00347
         		41
    ABD786 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00348
         		12
    ABD787 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00349
         		Stable
    ABD794 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00350
         		Stable
    ABD795 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00351
         		15
    ABD798 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00352
         		Stable
    ABD799 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00353
         		Stable
    ABD812 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00354
         		585
  • These data demonstrate that it is possible to replace the phenylene group of -QRef with a saturated carbocyclic structure without a loss of metabolic stability. The data also demonstrate that this replacement is neither trivial nor predictable and can lead either to an increase or a decrease in metabolic stability.
    • Biological Study 3
  • The solubility of a number of APSAC compounds was determined and compared with the solubility of a range of structurally related compounds using the assays described previously.
  • Solubility in the biological model fasted state simulated intestinal fluid (FaSSIF) was determined for several APSAC compounds, as well as several reference compounds, using the aqueous solubility assay described above. The results are summarised in the following tables.
  • TABLE 4A
    Aqueous Solubility Data
    (Reference Compounds)
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00355
    Solubility
    Compound RX2 RX4 QRef (mg/mL)
    ABD455 Cl Cl
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00356
         		0.02
    ABD456 F F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00357
         		0.04
    ABD466 F F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00358
         		0.04
    ABD575 F Cl
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00359
         		0.07
  • TABLE 4B
    Aqueous Solubility Data
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00360
    Solubility
    Compound —RX2 —RX4 DQ (mg/mL)
    ABD599 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00361
         		0.03
    ABD655 —F —Cl
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00362
         		0.03
    ABD777 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00363
         		0.06
    ABD769 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00364
         		0.07
    ABD770 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00365
         		—
    ABD771 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00366
         		—
    ABD772 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00367
         		—
    ABD773 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00368
         		0.89
    ABD774 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00369
         		—
    ABD775 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00370
         		—
    ABD796 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00371
         		0.20
    ABD813 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00372
         		0.33
    ABD815 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00373
         		0.25
    ABD776 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00374
         		0.082
    ABD781 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00375
         		0.59
    ABD786 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00376
         		0.032
    ABD787 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00377
         		0.14
    ABD794 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00378
         		0.012
    ABD795 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00379
         		0.05
    ABD798 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00380
         		4.7
    ABD799 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00381
         		7.2
    ABD812 —F —F
    Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00382
         		0.98
  • These data demonstrate that it is possible to achieve a substantial increase in solubility by replacing the phenylene group of -QRef with a saturated carbocyclic structure. The data also demonstrate that this replacement is neither trivial nor predictable and can lead either to an increase or a decrease in metabolic stability. Furthermore, the data show the exceptional aqueous solubility imparted by the groups 3-(CH2OH)-cyclopent-1-yl (e.g., as found in ABD773), 4-(CH2OH)-cyclohex-1-yl (e.g., as found in ABD781) and 4-(NMe2)-cyclohexan-1-yl (e.g., as found in ABD798 and ABD799).
    • Biological Study 4
  • The oral absorption of the APSAC compounds, ABD773 and ABD781, was determined in a rat model as described previously.
  • Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00383
  • Plasma levels of ABD773 or ABD781, following oral or intravenous dosage (1 mg/kg) (see FIGS. 1 and 2 and FIGS. 3 and 4 respectively), were investigated in vivo in rats using an ultra-performance LC/TOF-MS detection system, as described previously. The pharmacokinetic data are summarised in the following table.
  • TABLE 4
    Pharmacokinetic data
    Reference
    Compound
    ABD773 ABD781 ABD455
    (1 mg/kg) (1 mg/kg) (2.5 mg/kg)
    Bioavailability F %
    13 43 3
    p.o. i.v. p.o. i.v. p.o. i.v.
    AUC (ng/mL/ 1500 11900 9600 22400 1.2 9
    min)
    T1/2 (h) 3.17 0.81 3.28 0.87 0.8 0.53
  • The data show improved absorbance of the APSAC compound, ABD773, above that of the reference compound ABD455 (see FIGS. 5 and 6; Table 4) with a bioavailability (F) of 13% and an extended half life of 3.17 hours. The APSAC compound, ABD781, is especially well absorbed following oral administration with a bioavailability (F) of 43% and an extended half life of 3.28 hours and is superior to the reference compound ABD455. The data demonstrate that the APSAC compound ABD781 shows the properties required for an orally active drug.
    • Biological Study 5
  • The ability of APSAC compounds to activate caspase 3 in the presence of TNFα was determined using the fluorogenic enzyme substrate assay described previously.
  • FIG. 7 shows a series of images of human monocytes monitored using fluorescent light microscopy and showing the effects of ABD599 and ABD781 on caspase 3 activation in the presence of TNFα: (a) TNFα alone; (b) TNFα with 10 μM ABD599, and (c) TNFα with 10 μM ABD781, by the use of a dye which fluoresces only on activation by caspase 3.
  • These data show that in the presence of TNFα alone no fluorescence is detected (the image is plain black with no light emission from the cells, as would be shown by white spots). This indicates that there is little activation of caspase 3 and that the cells do not undergo active apoptosis upon treatment with TNFα alone. Upon the addition of either ABD599 or ABD781, fluorescence is detected in the cell population, as demonstrated by the images showing a black background with multiple light emitting cells which appear as white dots. These data indicate that there has been significant activation of caspase 3 and that the cells are undergoing active apoptosis.
  • These data demonstrates that the APSAC compounds are able to activate caspase 3, and thus induce apoptosis, and therefore may be useful in the treatment of tumours associated with inactivation or impairment of caspase induction or with aberrant caspase signalling.
  • The foregoing has described the principles, preferred embodiments, and modes of operation of the present invention. However, the invention should not be construed as limited to the particular embodiments discussed. Instead, the above-described embodiments should be regarded as illustrative rather than restrictive, and it should be appreciated that variations may be made in those embodiments by workers skilled in the art without departing from the scope of the present invention.
    • REFERENCES
  • A number of patents and publications are cited herein in order to more fully describe and disclose the invention and the state of the art to which the invention pertains. Full citations for these references are provided below. Each of these references is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety into the present disclosure, to the same extent as if each individual reference was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
    • Baud et al., 1999, “Signaling by proinflammatory cytokines: oligomerization of TRAF2 and TRAF6 is sufficient for JNK and IKK activation and target gene induction via an amino-terminal effector domain”, Genes Dev., Vol. 13, pp. 1297-1308.
    • Baud et al., 2009, “Is NFκB a good target for cancer therapy? Hopes and pitfalls”, Nat. Rev. Drug Disc., Vol. 8, pp. 33-40.
    • Brennan et al., 1989, “Inhibitory effect of TNF alpha antibodies on synovial cell interleukin-1 production in rheumatoid arthritis”, Lancet, Vol. 2, pp. 244-247.
    • Brennan et al., 1992, “Enhanced expression of tumor necrosis factor receptor mRNA and protein in mononuclear cells isolated from rheumatoid arthritis synovial joints”, Eur. J. Immunol., Vol. 22, pp. 1907-1912.
    • Brennan et al., 1996, “Cytokines in autoimmunity”, Curr. Opin. Immunol., Vol. 8, pp. 872-877.
    • Elliott et al., 1994, “Randomised double-blind comparison of chimeric monoclonal antibody to tumour necrosis factor alpha (cA2) versus placebo in rheumatoid arthritis”, Lancet, Vol. 344, pp. 1105-1110.
    • Feldmann et al., 1994, “TNF alpha as a therapeutic target in rheumatoid arthritis,” Circ. Shock, Vol. 43, pp. 179-184.
    • Feldmann et al., 1996, “Rheumatoid arthritis”, Cell, Vol. 85, pp. 307-310.
    • Feldmann et al., 2001, “The role of TNF alpha and IL-1 in rheumatoid arthritis,” Curr. Dir. Autoimmun., Vol. 3, pp. 188-199.
    • Firestein et al., 1999, “Signal transduction and transcription factors in rheumatic disease”, Arthritis Rheum., Vol. 42, pp. 609-621.
    • Firestein, 1996, “Invasive fibroblast-like synoviocytes in rheumatoid arthritis. Passive responders or transformed aggressors?”, Arthritis Rheum., Vol. 39, pp. 1781-1790.
    • Firestein, 2005 “Immunologic mechanisms in the pathogenesis of rheumatoid arthritis”, J. Clin. Rheumatol., Vol. 11. pp. S39-S44.
    • Gottlieb, 2005, “Psoriasis: Emerging Therapeutic Strategies”, Nat. Rev. Drug Disc., Vol. 4, pp. 19-34.
    • Greig et al., 2004, “Alkyl aryl sulfonamides as therapeutic agents for the treatment of bone conditions”. Published international application publication number WO 2005/118528.
    • Greig et al., 2006, “Development and characterization of biphenylsulfonamides as novel inhibitors of bone resorption”, J. Med. Chem., Vol 49: pp 7487-7492.
    • Greig et al., 2008, “Biphenyl-4-yl-sulfonic acid arylamides and Their Use as Therapeutic Agents”, International patent publication number WO 2008/114022 (application number PCT/GB2008/000989) published 25 Sep. 2008.
    • Jin et al., 2004, “CCR8 Antagonists”, International patent publication number WO 2004/073619 A2 published 2 Sep. 2004
    • Jimi et al., 2004, “Selective inhibition of NF-kappa B blocks osteoclastogenesis and prevents inflammatory bone destruction in vivo”, Nat. Med., Vol. 10, pp. 617-624.
    • Joosten et al., 1996, “Anticytokine treatment of established type II collagen-induced arthritis in DBA/1 mice. A comparative study using anti-TNF alpha, anti-IL-1 alpha/beta, and IL-1 Ra,” Arthritis Rheum., Vol. 39, pp. 797-809.
    • Klareskog et al., 2006, “A long-term, open-label trial of the safety and efficacy of etanercept (Enbrel) in patients with rheumatoid arthritis not treated with other disease-modifying antirheumatic drugs”, Ann. Rheum. Dis., Vol. 65, pp. 1578-1584.
    • Klareskog et al., 2006, “Mechanisms of disease: Genetic susceptibility and environmental triggers in the development of rheumatoid arthritis,” Nat. Clin. Pract. Rheumatol., Vol. 2, pp. 425-433.
    • Korzenik et al., 2006, “Evolving knowledge and therapy of inflammatory bowel disease,” Nat. Rev. Drug Disc., Vol. 5, pp. 197-209.
    • Li et al., 2008, “A tumor necrosis factor-[alpha]-mediated pathway promoting autosomal dominant polycystic kidney disease”, Nature Medicine, Vol. 14(8), pp. 863-868.
    • Liu, 2005, “Molecular mechanism of TNF signaling and beyond,” Cell Res., Vol. 15, pp. 24-27.
    • Luckman et al. 1998, “Heterocycle-containing bisphosphonates cause apoptosis and inhibit bone resorption by preventing protein prenylation: evidence from structure-activity relationships in J774 macrophages,” J. Bone Miner. Res., Vol. 13, pp. 1668-1678.
    • Mantovani, 2009, “Inflaming metastasis”, Nature, Vol. 457, pp. 36-37.
    • McInnes et al., 2005, “Targeting cytokines beyond tumor necrosis factor-alpha and interleukin-1 in rheumatoid arthritis”, Curr. Pain Headache Rep., Vol. 9, pp. 405-411.
    • Mount et al., 2005, “Rheumatoid arthritis market”, Nat. Rev. Drug Disc., Vol. 2, pp. 11-12.
    • Nociari et al., 1998, “A Novel one-step, highly sensitive fluorimetric assay to evaluate cell-mediated cytotoxicity”, Journal of Immunological Methods, Vol. 213, pp. 157-167.
    • O'Brien et al., 2000, “Structure-activity relationships and pharmacokinetic analysis for a series of potent, systemically available biphenylsulfonamide matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors”. J. Med. Chem. Vol 43: pp 156-166.
    • Philchenkov et al., 2004, “Caspases and cancer: mechanisms of inactivation and new treatment modalities”, Exp. Oncol., Vol 26, pp 82-97.
    • Roodman, 2006, “Regulation of osteoclast differentiation”, Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., Vol. 1068, pp. 100-109.
    • Smolen et al., 2003, “Therapeutic Strategies for Rheumatoid Arthritis”, Nat. Rev. Drug Disc., Vol. 2, pp. 473-488.
    • Tanaka et al., 2003, Signal transduction pathways regulating osteoclast differentiation and function,” J. Bone Miner. Metab., Vol. 21, pp. 123-133.
    • van den Berg et al., 1999, “Pathogenesis of joint damage in rheumatoid arthritis: evidence of a dominant role for interleukin-I”, Baillieres Best Pract. Res. Clin. Rheumatol., Vol. 13, pp. 577-597.
    • van den Berg, 2002, “Is there a rationale for combined TNF and IL-1 blocking in arthritis?”, Clin. Exp. Rheumatol., Vol. 20, pp. S21-S25.
    • Weissmann, 2006, “The pathogenesis of rheumatoid arthritis,” Bull. Hosp. Jt. Dis.,
  • Vol. 64, pp. 12-15.
    • Ziff, 1990, “Rheumatoid arthritis—it's present and future”, J. Rheumatol., Vol. 17, pp. 127-133.

Claims (48)

1-289. (canceled)
290. A method of treatment of rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of said treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from compounds of the following formula, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00384
wherein:
either: ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —CH═;
or: ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —N═;
—RX2 is —RX2S;
—RX4 is —RX4S;
—RX2S is independently —F, —Cl, or —CF3;
—RX4S is independently —F, —Cl, or —CF3;
—RXC1 is independently —H or —RXCC;
—RXC2 is independently —H;
—RXCC is independently —F, —Cl, or —RXCCC;
RXCCC is independently-Me or -Et;
—RSN is —H;
-DQ is -D1-Q1;
either: -D1 is cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl;
or: -D1- is 4-methyl-cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl; and
-Q1 is —OH.
291. A method according to claim 290, wherein ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —CH═.
292. A method according to claim 290, wherein ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —N═.
293. A method according to claim 291, wherein -D1 is cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
294. A method according to claim 292, wherein -D1 is cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
295. A method according to claim 291, wherein -D1 is 4-methyl-cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
296. A method according to claim 292, wherein -D1 is 4-methyl-cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
297. A method according to claim 293, wherein —RX2S is —F; and —RX4S is —F.
298. A method according to claim 294, wherein —RX2S is —F; and —RX4S is —F.
299. A method according to claim 295, wherein —RX2S is —F; and —RX4S is —F.
300. A method according to claim 296, wherein —RX2S is —F; and —RX4S is —F.
301. A method according to claim 293, wherein —RX2S is —Cl; and —RX4S is —Cl.
302. A method according to claim 294, wherein —RX2S is —Cl; and —RX4S is —Cl.
303. A method according to claim 295, wherein —RX2S is —Cl; and —RX4S is —Cl.
304. A method according to claim 296, wherein —RX2S is —Cl; and —RX4S is —Cl.
305. A method according to claim 297, wherein —RXC1 is —H.
306. A method according to claim 298, wherein —RXC1 is —H.
307. A method according to claim 299, wherein —RXC1 is —H.
308. A method according to claim 300, wherein —RXC1 is —H.
309. A method according to claim 301, wherein —RXC1 is —H.
310. A method according to claim 302, wherein —RXC1 is —H.
311. A method according to claim 303, wherein —RXC1 is —H.
312. A method according to claim 304, wherein —RXC1 is —H.
313. A method according to claim 297, wherein —RXC1 is —RXCC; and —RXCC is F.
314. A method according to claim 298, wherein —RXC1 is —RXCC; and —RXCC is F.
315. A method according to claim 299, wherein —RXC1 is —RXCC; and —RXCC is F.
316. A method according to claim 300, wherein —RXC1 is —RXCC; and —RXCC is F.
317. A method according to claim 301, wherein —RXC1 is —RXCC; and —RXCC is F.
318. A method according to claim 302, wherein —RXC1 is —RXCC; and —RXCC is F.
319. A method according to claim 303, wherein —RXC1 is —RXCC; and —RXCC is F.
320. A method according to claim 304, wherein —RXC1 is —RXCC; and —RXCC is F.
321. A method according to claim 297, wherein —RXCC is —RXCCC; and —RXCCC is -Me.
322. A method according to claim 298, wherein —RXCC is —RXCCC; and —RXCCC is -Me.
323. A method according to claim 299, wherein —RXCC is —RXCCC; and —RXCCC is -Me.
324. A method according to claim 300, wherein —RXCC is —RXCCC; and —RXCCC is -Me.
325. A method according to claim 301, wherein —RXCC is —RXCCC; and —RXCCC is -Me.
326. A method according to claim 302, wherein —RXCC is —RXCCC; and —RXCCC is -Me.
327. A method according to claim 303, wherein —RXCC is —RXCCC; and —RXCCC is -Me.
328. A method according to claim 304, wherein —RXCC is —RXCCC; and —RXCCC is -Me.
329. A method of treatment of rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of said treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from compounds of the following formula, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00385
wherein:
either: ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —CH═;
or: ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —N═;
—RX2 is —RX2S;
—RX4 is —RX4S;
RX2S is —RX;
RX4S is —RX;
each —RX is
independently —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —RXX, —OH, —ORXX, —SRXX, —CF3, —OCF3, —SCF3, —C(═O)RXX, —CN, or —NO2;
each —RXX is saturated aliphatic C1-4alkyl;
—RSN is —H;
-DQ is -D1-Q1;
either: -D1 is cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl;
or: -D1- is 4-methyl-cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl; and
-Q1 is —OH.
330. A method according to claim 329, wherein ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —CH═.
331. A method according to claim 329, wherein ═W— is —CH═ and —Y═ is —N═.
332. A method according to claim 330, wherein -D1 is cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
333. A method according to claim 331, wherein -D1 is cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
334. A method according to claim 330, wherein -D1 is 4-methyl-cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
335. A method according to claim 331, wherein -D1 is 4-methyl-cyclohexane-1,4-di-yl.
336. A method of treatment of rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of said treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from compounds of the following formulae, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
Figure US20150141472A1-20150521-C00386
US14/464,973 2008-09-19 2014-08-21 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use Active US9050329B1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/464,973 US9050329B1 (en) 2008-09-19 2014-08-21 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US14/720,237 US9302984B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2015-05-22 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US15/075,356 US9616037B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2016-03-21 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US9827108P 2008-09-19 2008-09-19
GBGB0817207.4A GB0817207D0 (en) 2008-09-19 2008-09-19 therapeutic apsac compounds and their use
GB0817207.4 2008-09-19
PCT/GB2009/002221 WO2010032009A1 (en) 2008-09-19 2009-09-18 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US201113063956A 2011-03-15 2011-03-15
US13/886,799 US8822507B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2013-05-03 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US14/464,973 US9050329B1 (en) 2008-09-19 2014-08-21 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/886,799 Continuation US8822507B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2013-05-03 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/720,237 Continuation US9302984B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2015-05-22 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20150141472A1 true US20150141472A1 (en) 2015-05-21
US9050329B1 US9050329B1 (en) 2015-06-09

Family

ID=39951895

Family Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/063,956 Active 2030-04-18 US8435968B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2009-09-18 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US13/886,799 Active US8822507B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2013-05-03 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US14/464,973 Active US9050329B1 (en) 2008-09-19 2014-08-21 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US14/720,237 Active US9302984B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2015-05-22 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US15/075,356 Active US9616037B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2016-03-21 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/063,956 Active 2030-04-18 US8435968B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2009-09-18 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US13/886,799 Active US8822507B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2013-05-03 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use

Family Applications After (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/720,237 Active US9302984B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2015-05-22 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US15/075,356 Active US9616037B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2016-03-21 Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use

Country Status (14)

Country Link
US (5) US8435968B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2344449B1 (en)
JP (1) JP5771524B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2736971C (en)
CY (1) CY1116650T1 (en)
DK (1) DK2344449T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2544511T3 (en)
GB (1) GB0817207D0 (en)
HR (1) HRP20150839T1 (en)
PL (1) PL2344449T3 (en)
PT (1) PT2344449E (en)
SI (1) SI2344449T1 (en)
SM (1) SMT201500218B (en)
WO (1) WO2010032009A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9302984B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2016-04-05 Pimco 2664 Limited Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US9624167B2 (en) 2013-06-26 2017-04-18 Pimco 2664 Limited N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamides and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)benzenesulfonamides and their therapeutic use
US10005733B2 (en) 2014-12-17 2018-06-26 Pimco 2664 Limited N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamide and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)-benzenesulfonamide compounds and their therapeutic use

Families Citing this family (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB0705400D0 (en) 2007-03-21 2007-05-02 Univ Aberdeen Therapeutic compounds andm their use
GB0817208D0 (en) 2008-09-19 2008-10-29 Pimco 2664 Ltd Therapeutic apsap compounds and their use
US8394858B2 (en) * 2009-12-03 2013-03-12 Novartis Ag Cyclohexane derivatives and uses thereof
MX2014012236A (en) 2012-04-10 2014-11-25 Sumitomo Dainippon Pharma Co Ltd Novel 1-substituted indazole derivative.
TWI823164B (en) 2018-02-16 2023-11-21 美商基利科學股份有限公司 Methods and intermediates for preparing therapeutic compounds
TWI814350B (en) 2018-07-16 2023-09-01 美商基利科學股份有限公司 Capsid inhibitors for the treatment of hiv
GB201813312D0 (en) * 2018-08-15 2018-09-26 Modern Biosciences Ltd Compounds and their therapeutic use
GB201905520D0 (en) 2019-04-18 2019-06-05 Modern Biosciences Ltd Compounds and their therapeutic use
EP4065116B1 (en) 2019-11-26 2026-01-21 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Capsid inhibitors for the prevention of hiv
CA3237155A1 (en) 2021-12-03 2023-06-08 Zhimin Du Therapeutic compounds for hiv virus infection
SI4440702T1 (en) 2021-12-03 2025-09-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Therapeutic compounds for hiv virus infection
AU2022403012B2 (en) 2021-12-03 2026-02-12 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Therapeutic compounds for hiv virus infection
EP4431090A1 (en) 2023-03-15 2024-09-18 Istesso 1 Limited Solfonamides acting as mitochondrial complex i modulator compounds
GB202308547D0 (en) 2023-06-08 2023-07-26 Istesso 2 Ltd Tnf inhibitor combination therapies
GB202309515D0 (en) 2023-06-23 2023-08-09 Istesso 2 Ltd JAK inhibitor and IL-6 inhibitor combination therapies
GB202315822D0 (en) 2023-10-16 2023-11-29 Istesso 3 Ltd Anti-fibrotic combination therapeutics
GB202317050D0 (en) 2023-11-07 2023-12-20 Istesso 2 Ltd Disease modifying anti-rheumatic drug combination therapies
EP4647071A1 (en) 2024-05-10 2025-11-12 Istesso Therapeutics Limited Mitochondrial complex i modulator for use in the treatment of arthritis

Family Cites Families (67)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB597810A (en) 1943-04-12 1948-02-04 Gen Printing Ink Corp Improvements in or relating to derivatives of diphenyl
DE1046220B (en) 1956-04-21 1958-12-11 Bayer Ag Process for the production of monoazo dyes and their metal complex compounds
US4119784A (en) 1977-07-01 1978-10-10 American Cyanamid Company Anionic substituted sulfonamido biphenyls
DE3000519A1 (en) 1979-02-01 1980-08-14 Byk Gulden Lomberg Chem Fab Omega-Benzene-sulphonamido:phenyl-alkanoic acid derivs. - useful as hypoglycaemics and inhibitors of hepatic glucose synthesis to treat e.g. pre-diabetic states and circulatory disorders
DE3535167A1 (en) 1985-10-02 1987-04-09 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh NEW SULFONYL-PHENYL (ALKYL) AMINES, METHOD FOR THEIR PRODUCTION AND MEDICINAL PRODUCTS
IL118325A0 (en) 1995-05-25 1996-10-31 Pont Merck And Pharmaceutical Integrin receptor antagonists and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
SK56798A3 (en) 1995-10-30 1998-12-02 Smithkline Beecham Corp Protease inhibitors, pharmaceutical composition containing them and their use
US5760028A (en) 1995-12-22 1998-06-02 The Dupont Merck Pharmaceutical Company Integrin receptor antagonists
JP2001527513A (en) 1996-03-15 2001-12-25 デュポン ファーマシューティカルズ カンパニー Spirocyclic integrin inhibitors
JP2000515153A (en) 1996-07-22 2000-11-14 モンサント カンパニー Thiolsulfonamide metalloprotease inhibitor
ATE210637T1 (en) 1996-10-16 2001-12-15 American Cyanamid Co PREPARATION AND APPLICATION OF ORTHO-SULFONAMIDO-ARYL-HYDROXAMIC ACIDS AS MATRIX METALLOPROTEINASE AND TACE INHIBITORS
EP0944619B1 (en) 1996-11-27 2006-10-11 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Novel integrin receptor antagonists
AU6780398A (en) 1997-03-28 1998-10-22 Du Pont Merck Pharmaceutical Company, The Heterocyclic integrin inhibitor prodrugs
CA2289602A1 (en) 1997-05-08 1998-11-12 William Edward Bondinell Protease inhibitors
DE19719621A1 (en) 1997-05-09 1998-11-12 Hoechst Ag Sulfonylaminocarboxylic acids
ATE210639T1 (en) 1997-05-09 2001-12-15 Hoechst Ag SUBSTITUTED DIAMINOCARBOXYLIC ACIDS
US6291425B1 (en) 1999-09-01 2001-09-18 Guilford Pharmaceuticals Inc. Compounds, methods and pharmaceutical compositions for treating cellular damage, such as neural or cardiovascular tissue damage
UA63990C2 (en) 1998-01-23 2004-02-16 Авентіс Фарма Дойчланд Гмбх Novel sulfonamide derivatives as bone tissue resoprtion inhibitors and cells adhesion inhibitors
JP4750272B2 (en) 1998-02-04 2011-08-17 ノバルティス アーゲー Sulfonylamino derivatives that inhibit matrix-degrading metalloproteinases
JPH11246527A (en) 1998-03-02 1999-09-14 Shionogi & Co Ltd Mmp-8 inhibitor
DE19815547C1 (en) 1998-04-07 1999-12-02 Joachim Schmidt Adhesive for dentures
EP0960882A1 (en) 1998-05-19 1999-12-01 Hoechst Marion Roussel Deutschland GmbH Thienyl substituted acylguanidines as inhibitors of bone resorption and vitronectin receptor antagonists
BR0109348A (en) 2000-03-21 2003-06-10 Procter & Gamble Unsubstituted metalloprotease inhibitors which contain carbocyclic side chains
WO2001090077A1 (en) 2000-05-19 2001-11-29 Guilford Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sulfonamide and carbamide derivatives of 6(5h)phenanthridinones and their uses
WO2002060867A2 (en) 2001-01-29 2002-08-08 Insight Strategy And Marketing Ltd Carbazole derivatives and their uses as heparanase inhibitors
WO2002074298A1 (en) 2001-03-21 2002-09-26 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Il-6 production inhibitors
US6849635B2 (en) 2001-05-07 2005-02-01 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Sulfonamides
HUP0401963A3 (en) 2001-08-09 2006-01-30 Ono Pharmaceutical Co Carboxylic acid derivative compounds and drugs comprising these compounds as the active ingredient
HU227543B1 (en) * 2001-09-28 2011-08-29 Richter Gedeon Nyrt N-[4-(2-piperazin- and 2-piperidin-1-yl-ethyl)-cyclohexyl]-sulfon- and sulfamides, process for their preparation, their use and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
GB0126157D0 (en) 2001-10-31 2002-01-02 Univ Aberdeen Therapeutic compounds
AU2003221160A1 (en) 2002-03-27 2003-10-08 Shionogi And Co., Ltd. Decomposition inhibitor for extracellular matrix of cartilage
DE10228103A1 (en) 2002-06-24 2004-01-15 Bayer Cropscience Ag Fungicidal active ingredient combinations
EP1537116B1 (en) 2002-09-04 2010-06-02 Schering Corporation Pyrazolopyrimidines suitable for the treatment of cancer diseases
DE10251170A1 (en) 2002-10-31 2004-05-13 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg New beta agonists, processes for their production and their use as medicines
WO2004073619A2 (en) 2003-02-14 2004-09-02 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Ccr8 antagonists
WO2004098582A2 (en) 2003-05-07 2004-11-18 The University Court Of The University Of Aberdeen Ketones and reduced ketones as therapeutic agents for the treatment of bone conditions
JPWO2004106290A1 (en) 2003-05-14 2006-07-20 キッセイ薬品工業株式会社 Aminoalcohol derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions containing them, and uses thereof
US7563748B2 (en) 2003-06-23 2009-07-21 Cognis Ip Management Gmbh Alcohol alkoxylate carriers for pesticide active ingredients
TW200530157A (en) 2003-09-09 2005-09-16 Japan Tobacco Inc Dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitor
GB0324792D0 (en) 2003-10-23 2003-11-26 Sterix Ltd Compound
BRPI0417687A (en) 2003-12-19 2007-04-03 Pfizer benzenesulfonylamino-pyridin-2-yl derivatives and related compounds as 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 (11-beta-hsd-1) inhibitors for the treatment of diabetes and obesity
EP1723132A1 (en) 2004-02-12 2006-11-22 Asterand Uk Limited Ep2 receptor agonists
GB0405193D0 (en) 2004-03-08 2004-04-21 Medical Res Council Compounds
CA2560739A1 (en) * 2004-03-22 2005-10-06 Southern Research Institute Nonpeptide inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinases
US20080255240A1 (en) 2004-05-05 2008-10-16 Novo Nordisk A/S Sulfonamide Derivatives
GB0412553D0 (en) * 2004-06-04 2004-07-07 Univ Aberdeen Therapeutic agents for the treatment of bone conditions
WO2005123089A2 (en) 2004-06-10 2005-12-29 Kalypsys, Inc. Multicyclic sulfonamide compounds as inhibitors of histone deacetylase for the treatment of disease
RU2346996C2 (en) 2004-06-29 2009-02-20 ЮРОПИЭН НИКЕЛЬ ПиЭлСи Improved leaching of base metals
US20090093485A1 (en) 2004-10-29 2009-04-09 Astrazeneca Ab Novel Sulphonamide Derivatives as Glucocorticoid Receptor Modulators for the Treatment of Inflammatory Diseases
EP1659113A1 (en) 2004-11-08 2006-05-24 Evotec AG Inhibitors of 11beta-hydroxy steroid dehydrogenase type 1 (11beta-HSD1)
CA2610903A1 (en) 2005-06-16 2006-12-21 Pfizer Inc. N-(pyridin-2-yl)-sulfonamide derivatives
DE602006020138D1 (en) 2005-06-29 2011-03-31 Compumedics Ltd SENSOR ARRANGEMENT WITH CONDUCTIVE BRIDGE
WO2007008541A2 (en) 2005-07-08 2007-01-18 Kalypsys, Inc. Cellular cholesterol absorption modifiers
TW200720261A (en) 2005-08-31 2007-06-01 Sankyo Co Phenylene derivatives
KR101561482B1 (en) 2005-11-08 2015-10-20 버텍스 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 Heterocyclic modulators of ATP-binding cassette transporters
CA2635531C (en) 2005-12-29 2014-06-17 Lexicon Pharmaceutical Inc. Multicyclic amino acid derivatives and methods of their use
TW200801513A (en) 2006-06-29 2008-01-01 Fermiscan Australia Pty Ltd Improved process
WO2008005338A1 (en) * 2006-06-29 2008-01-10 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the histamine h3-receptor useful for the treatment of disorders related thereto
MY148634A (en) * 2006-07-25 2013-05-15 Cephalon Inc Pyridazinone derivatives
US7560597B2 (en) 2007-03-08 2009-07-14 The University Court Of The University Of Aberdeen 2′,4′-dichloro-biphenyl-4-yl-hydroxy-ketones and related compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
GB0705400D0 (en) 2007-03-21 2007-05-02 Univ Aberdeen Therapeutic compounds andm their use
WO2010000020A1 (en) 2008-06-30 2010-01-07 Cathrx Ltd A catheter
US8283368B2 (en) 2008-08-29 2012-10-09 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Selective ligands for the dopamine 3 (D3) receptor and methods of using the same
TWI453207B (en) 2008-09-08 2014-09-21 Signal Pharm Llc Aminotriazolopyridines, compositions thereof, and methods of treatment therewith
GB0817208D0 (en) 2008-09-19 2008-10-29 Pimco 2664 Ltd Therapeutic apsap compounds and their use
GB0817207D0 (en) 2008-09-19 2008-10-29 Pimco 2664 Ltd therapeutic apsac compounds and their use
GB201311361D0 (en) 2013-06-26 2013-08-14 Pimco 2664 Ltd Compounds and their therapeutic use

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9302984B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2016-04-05 Pimco 2664 Limited Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US9616037B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2017-04-11 Pimco 2664 Limited Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US9624167B2 (en) 2013-06-26 2017-04-18 Pimco 2664 Limited N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamides and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)benzenesulfonamides and their therapeutic use
US9796670B2 (en) 2013-06-26 2017-10-24 Pimco 2664 Limited N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamides and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)benzenesulfonamides and their therapeutic use
US10029979B2 (en) 2013-06-26 2018-07-24 Pimco 2664 Limited N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamides and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)benzenesulfonamides and their therapeutic use
US10233147B2 (en) 2013-06-26 2019-03-19 Pimco 2664 Limited N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamides and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)benzenesulfonamides and their therapeutic use
US10005733B2 (en) 2014-12-17 2018-06-26 Pimco 2664 Limited N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamide and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)-benzenesulfonamide compounds and their therapeutic use

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2344449B1 (en) 2015-05-13
ES2544511T3 (en) 2015-08-31
US9302984B2 (en) 2016-04-05
US8435968B2 (en) 2013-05-07
PL2344449T3 (en) 2015-10-30
SMT201500218B (en) 2015-10-30
US20150266815A1 (en) 2015-09-24
US8822507B2 (en) 2014-09-02
EP2344449A1 (en) 2011-07-20
JP2012502964A (en) 2012-02-02
US20160206578A1 (en) 2016-07-21
HRP20150839T1 (en) 2015-09-11
PT2344449E (en) 2015-09-16
CY1116650T1 (en) 2017-03-15
WO2010032009A1 (en) 2010-03-25
JP5771524B2 (en) 2015-09-02
US20130245018A1 (en) 2013-09-19
US9616037B2 (en) 2017-04-11
US9050329B1 (en) 2015-06-09
SI2344449T1 (en) 2015-09-30
GB0817207D0 (en) 2008-10-29
DK2344449T3 (en) 2015-08-17
CA2736971C (en) 2017-06-20
CA2736971A1 (en) 2010-03-25
US20110172189A1 (en) 2011-07-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9616037B2 (en) Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamido-cycloalkyl compounds and their use
US8207167B2 (en) Aryl-phenyl-sulfonamide-phenylene compounds and their use
US10233147B2 (en) N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamides and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)benzenesulfonamides and their therapeutic use
US8524778B2 (en) Biphenyl-4-yl-sulfonic acid arylamides and their use as therapeutic agents
US10005733B2 (en) N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamide and N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)-benzenesulfonamide compounds and their therapeutic use
US7560597B2 (en) 2′,4′-dichloro-biphenyl-4-yl-hydroxy-ketones and related compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
HK1218115B (en) N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamides and n-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)benzenesulfonamides and their therapeutic use
HK1242691B (en) N-(4-hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-phenyl-benzenesulfonamide and n-(-4hydroxy-4-methyl-cyclohexyl)-4-(2-pyridyl)-benzenesulfonamide compounds and their therapeutic use

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: PIMCO 2664 LIMITED, UNITED KINGDOM

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:GREIG, IAIN ROBERT;SHERIDAN, ROSE MARY;FISHER, RAYMOND;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20110407 TO 20110505;REEL/FRAME:033597/0224

STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE

MAFP Maintenance fee payment

Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 4TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1551); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

Year of fee payment: 4

MAFP Maintenance fee payment

Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1552); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

Year of fee payment: 8